Technical Specification MEP Works

1
Computer Aided Drafting (CAD) Standard
Building and Construction
PESHAWER GENRAL HOSPITAL
Project of PESHAWER HEALTHCARE Pvt Ltd
Technical Specifications
CAD, HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Fighting, Medical Gases, Elevators
SMACNA, ASHARE, NEFPA, UNIFORM PLUMBING CODES
Prepared by,
ZAHID QAYUM
Mechanical Engineer(HVAC/MEP)
Meinhardt Pakistan Pvt Ltd

2
Introduction
The need for CAD Standards
For generating and keeping record of all floor plans of hospital facilities.these floor plans
support many facilities such as telecommunication, building automation systems, CCTV, Accees
control, maintenance management
Building Information Modeling
The BIM guidelines and purpose is to provide the nessecery requirement for the process of
recording project documentation, development and as built documentation.
Standard of Production
The intent for the standard production of drawings and plans is to allow a multitude of
personnel to review, revise, share, maintain and print various archived projects which all have
similar parameters. These parameters include • Layering and colors • Scale factors, line types
and line weights • Font type and size • Room and door numbering • Title block and sheet titles
• Drawing sequence and sheet numbers • Model/Paper space and external reference files
Sheet Numbering And File identification
The drawing/project sheet number for all projects must follow the single or double discipline,
uppercase alphabetic designator followed by a three-digit numerical sheet number with a dot,
no spaces. The three digit numerical number and dot can be used in any fashion at the
discretion of the coordinating professional and shall be similarly repeated by all disciplines. The
numbers shall be arranged and used on a project-by-project basis as it pertains to the size and
complexity of a project, the number of floors, construction phases, etc. A single or double digit
number or sheet number not using a dot is unacceptable (i.e. A100; A01 or A4). A building
name, acronym, project title or progress phase shall not be included in any way as part of the
sheet numbering. Below is an example of the sheet numbering nomenclature required
: “G0.01” or “A1.00” or “MD2.10” or “FP3.30”, etc. The first digit represents the discipline
designator (G – General Sheet) (A – Architectural Sheets) (MD – Mechanical Demolition Sheets)
(FP – Fire Protection Sheets) etc. Followed by a three digit numerical sheet number with a dot,
no spaces (0.01) (1.00) (2.10) (3.30) etc. which is determined by the coordinating professional
based on the project complexity/parameters and similarly followed by all other discipline
File Identification
The drawing/project file name for all projects must be represented with the project number
and drawing/project sheet number. Each CAD, PDF or Revit® drawing file shall be preceded with
the NUUNL project number followed by a hyphen and then the drawing sheet number (as

3
described previously) with no spaces. Finally, a last dot and then the file extension shall
conclude the complete file naming. A building name, acronym, project title or progress phase
shall not be included in any way as part of the file naming. Below is an example of the file
naming nomenclature
: “467123-A1.01.dwg” or “467123-SD2.01.pdf” The first digits represent the project number
(467123), then the hyphen as a placeholder to help make the name more readable and easier
to manage, followed by the sheet number (A1.01) (SD2.01). The sheet number includes the
discipline designator (A – Architectural) in this case a single digit used for Architectural but
expandable up to two alphabetical characters as indicated for (SD – Structural Demolition).
Next a three digit numerical sheet number with a dot, no spaces and finally the dot file name
extension (.dwg – AutoCAD® file) (.pdf – Adobe System File)
CAD Parameters
Units of Measure All CAD drawings shall be drawn in architectural units of feet and inches with
a precision not less than 1/64”. The format, precision and other conventions to be used in
displaying coordinates, distances and angles are set and saved in the drawing units. This system
of measure also pertains to the drawing geometry and appropriate distance values required
when dimensioning
Tolerances
Building floor plans, elevations, details and sections shall be shown at not less than 1/16” = 1’-
0” scale and no more than 1/2” = 1’-0” drawings scale. Enlarged partial floor plans, sections and
details shall be viewed at not less than 1/4" = 1’-0” and no more than 3/4" = 1’-0” drawing
scale. Details, schedules and risers are acceptable to be viewed with no particular drawing
scale. In these instances the text height of non-scaled entities shall follow the guidelines set
forth in the text styles, heights and fonts sections.
SCALE FACTER AND TEXT
All General drawing plan text size shall be printed out with minimum scale 3/32”
DRAWING
Drawing Description
All drawing plan layout entities including but not limited to details, diagrams, hatch patterns,
wall types, symbols, line types, text and other predefined entities are strictly required to be
created in the correct standard layers and with bylayer properties. All predefined entities shall
revert to layer 0 or bylayer properties when exploded. All predefined entities created in
programs other than AutoCAD® shall also requires the use of bylayer properties in order to
swiftly and easily convert misused vendor layers and colors to the required standard layer and
layer properties. The standard layer properties are essential to internal reproduction of plans
from department to department without the need for storing and managing vendor plot styles.
Similarly blocks, symbols and details shall also be created with bylayer properties and revert to

4
layer 0 or bylayer properties when exploded. Refer to the Blocks and Details section herein for
additional information on the use and insertion of blocks within floor plans, drawings and/or
xref
DRAWING WALLS
All walls and elements of wall construction shall be clean and clear of erroneous additional
lines, double lines, fillers, hatch patterns, etc. which depict drywall, vapor barriers, insulation,
air gaps, etc. Wall intersections shall be shown as actual intersections with lines terminating
and/or ACAD fillet with intersecting wall line so that it is also clean and clear of erroneous lines,
double lines, fillers, hatch patterns, etc. Drawings to depict the various construction materials
of the wall then the outer most lines of the drawn wall shall be on layer A-WALL and all other
lines labeled with an alternate layer name so that erroneous lines not relevant can be easily
frozen or isolated and erased upon delivery of drawing file .
Room,Space And Area
Polylines and Room Square Footage Each room, space, area, and general circulation space such
as lobbies, corridors, vestibules, stairs and mezzanines shall be individually enclosed by a
continuously joined polyline. The Polyline and square footage number associated with these
individual space polylines shall be included in the space on the plans and provided on the
appropriate layer and in the text style, font and size as listed in the text table herein this
document. The space polyline and area square footage numbers associated with individual
rooms, spaces and area as previously described shall be included on the AutoCAD®.dwg plans.
This procedure is similar to the process created with using BIM models. When a BIM model is
used the polyline process shall be exported from Revit® as part of the AutoCAD® export feature.
When exporting Revit® to AutoCAD® in session export setup click the Modify Export Setup
button then select the General tab. Under the General tab check the Room and Area
Boundaries box to Export Rooms and Areas as Polylines
Text
Text Descriptions
It requires that all text associated with the drawing of building floor plans, elevations, enlarged
floor plans, section, details, schedules, risers, notes, call-outs, dimensions and titles be
represented a standard text style and font as indicated in the table below. All model text
heights shown (unless noted otherwise) represent a model space layout drawn at 1/8”=1’-0”
scale. Refer to the afore mentioned scale factor section for conversion of model space text
height per respective scale factor

5
Dimensiong
Diemension Description
All dimensioning shall be completed in model space. Dimensioning shall also be completed in
layer AANNO-DIMS, bylayer, white (7), continuous linetype and default lineweight
Blocks,Details and Title Blocks
All parameters of a CAD drawing including blocks, details, symbols and any other predefined
entities shall be easily modified. Floor plans, backgrounds, blocks, details, symbols and other
predefined entities shall be easily manipulated to match the uniform standard layer and layer
color assignments for best viewing and plotting.
All blocks, block definitions, details, hatch patterns, walls types, symbols, line types and other
predefined entities including block attributes shall be created in layer 0 with bylayer properties.
All predefined block entities shall revert to layer 0 and Bylayer properties when exploded.
Blocks created in layer 0 and bylayer properties shall be inserted into the CAD drawing and then
placed in the respective layer for said entity. All predefined entities created in programs other
than AutoCAD® shall also revert to layer 0 and bylayer properties. Avoid the use of nested block
Addenda ,Revisions Drawings
Construction revisions that impact a project’s drawing set including addendums, sketches,
change directives and supplemental instructions/information shall be clearly documented and
provided as part of the AutoCAD®.dwg construction drawing. Any changes made to the original
construction set of drawings shall be highlighted using a revision cloud and revision delta
triangle.
The addenda are required to follow all standards as set forth herein as well as follow AIA
documentation. During construction or pre-construction these revisions shall become part of
the final set of construction As-Built drawings. Refer to Project Closeout section herein for
additional information
Discipline Designator
A Architectural
B Geotechnical
C Civil
D Process
E Electrical
F Fire Protection
G General

6
H Hazardous Material I Interiors L Landscape
M Mechanical
O Operations
P Plumbing
Q Equipment
R Resource
S Structural
T Telecommunication
V Survey / Mapping
W Distributed Energy
X Other Disciplines
Z Contractor/Shop Dwgs.
The optional second character is used to further define the discipline character. As an example,
the Level 2 Discipline Designators for Architectural are shown:
A Architectural
AD Architectural Demolition
AE Architectural Elements
AF Architectural Finishes
AG Architectural Graphics
AI Architectural Interiors
AS Architectural Site
AJ User Defined
AK User Defined
A typical layer name showing the required data fields only. Note that the mandatory Level 1
discipline character is supplemented by the optional discipline modifier to create a Level 2
Discipline Designator.
For a complete list of Discipline Designators see CLG Appendix A - List of Discipline Designators,
Major and Minor CAD Standards Appendix A - Discipline Designators, UDS section 1.6

7
CAD Templates
Space & Door Numbering Requirements
Room, Space & Area Numbering
Refer to the Space and Door numbering convention in the University design guidelines and
provide as necessary per requirements. Room, Space and Area numbers shall be provided on
appropriate layers and in the text style, font and size .
Printing
Prepared progress submittals, final construction documents or “as-built” documents shall be
printed from paper space layout. Each paper space layout page shall have settings saved in the
Page Setup Manager. Printer/Plotter device, paper size, paper area, plot scale, drawing
orientation, layout viewports and a competed title block are the parameters that shall be set
within the page setup manager.
Sheet Size
all drawing to be delivered on a standard 24”x36” or 30”x42” sheet size. required cover sheets
and title block templates on 24”x36” and 30”x42” sheets . There may be times when it may
become necessary to utilize a larger or alternate sized sheet size for special circumstances. In
the event an alternate sheet size is needed a new cover sheet and title block shall be
constructed similarly and with the same attributes as the standard cover sheet and title block.
The alternate sheet size, cover sheet and title block shall be submitted and approved prior to its
use describing the reason to waiver away from the standard sheet size.
As-Built Documents
Delivery of As-Built Construction drawing files whether produced in CAD or BIM shall be
delivered in the same format as described in these guidelines. all As-Built drawing files to be
submitted in the most current version of AutoCAD®. AutoCAD® files shall also be accompanied
with a respective .pdf in order to properly view the intent of the As-Built plotted AutoCAD®.dwg
file. As-built drawings shall include all addendums, change directives, supplemental instructions
and any other revisions made to a project that can be identified and indicated on the drawings
shall become part of the As-Built file. Revision clouds and revision identification tags shall not
be included as part of the As-built plans and will not be accepted at project closeout. The As-
built file and any changes shall be provided in the proper layer and layer attributes as well as all
other standards
Construction Revisions
Construction revisions that impact a project’s drawing set including change directives and
supplemental instructions shall be documented and provided electronically as part of the As-
Built AutoCAD® file. Include all AIA documentation, correspondence and discussions regarding
said revisions. During construction or pre-construction these revisions may have been

8
submitted under separate cover and separate title block sheet. However at closeout of the
project these shall become part of the final set of construction As-Built drawings..
Delivery
All CAD drawings submitted shall be purged of all un-referenced dimension styles, linetypes,
blocks, layers, shapes and text styles. the CAD standards are strictly followed. Drawings
submitted without bound xrefs, improper layering, door numbering, sheet/file naming, title
block/sheet sizes or any other improper parameters set forth herein, are subject to rejection
and revision. The delay of a project or missing project delivery milestones as a result of
rejection of an AutoCAD®.dwg will not be acceptable.

10
1. GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section describes Basic Mechanical Requirements required to provide for a
complete installation of all mechanical systems for this project. This section shall apply
to all other mechanical Division specification sections as well as all work shown on the
drawings.
B. Mechanical demolition requirements (if any).
C. It is the intent of the Mechanical Division of the Specifications that all mechanical work
specified herein be coordinated as required with the work of all other Divisions of the
Specifications and Drawings so that all installations operate as designed.
D. All systems shall be completely assembled, tested, adjusted and demonstrated to be
ready for operation to the satisfaction of the Owner’s representative.
E. The Contractor shall note that, in some cases, piping as shown on the Drawings
provide general location and routing information only. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing interference-free systems with proper clearance to facilities
and equipment.
F. Where the word “provide” is used, it shall mean “furnish and install” unless otherwise
noted or specified.
G. Note that the words “mechanical” and “plumbing” are used interchangeably
throughout the mechanical Division specification sections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Mechanical Division specification sections, apply to work of this
section and all other sections of Division
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work included under this section consists of providing all labor, materials,
supervision, and construction procedures necessary for the installation of the
complete mechanical systems required by these specifications and/or shown on the
drawings of the contract.
B. The Contract Drawings are shown in part diagrammatic intended to convey the scope
of work, indicating the intended general arrangement of equipment, piping fixtures,
etc. The Contractor shall follow the drawings in laying out work and verify clearances
for the installation of the materials and equipment based on the dimensions of actual

11
equipment furnished. Whenever a question exists as to the exact intended location of
outlets or equipment, obtain instructions from the Architect/Engineer before
proceeding with the work
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installers shall have a successful installation experience on projects with mechanical
installation work similar to that required by the project. All equipment and materials
shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be aligned, leveled, and
adjusted for Manufacturer of equipment and materials must be regularly engaged in
the manufacture of the specified equipment and material with similar construction
and capacities and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service,
unless noted otherwise in other Mechanical Sections
B. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping”, including all
addenda
1.5 REFERENCES
A. The design, manufacture, testing, and method of installation of all equipment and
materials furnished under the requirements of this specification shall conform to the
following as applicable:
1. Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.
2. Occupational Safety and Health Standards, and Established Standards.
3. ABMA - American Boiler Manufacturers Association.
4. ACCA - Air Conditioning Contractors of America.
5. ACGIH - American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.
6. ADC - Air Diffusion Council.
7. AGA - American Gas Association.
8. AIHA - American Industrial Hygiene Association.
9. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association.
10. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
11. ARI - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.
12. ASA - Acoustical Society of American.
13. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers.
14. ASME - The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
15. ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials.
16. CAGI - Compressed Air and Gas Institute.
17. CTI - Cooling Tower Institute.
18. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association.
19. ETL - Engineering Tests Laboratory.
20. HEI - Heat Exchange Institute.
21. HI - Hydraulic Institute.

12
22. HYD I - Hydronics Institute.
23. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials.
24. ICC – International Code Council.
25. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
26. NEC - National Electrical Code.
27. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
28. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
29. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation.
30. SAE - Society of Automatic Engineers.
31. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
32. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.
33. International Plumbing Code.
34. International Mechanical Code.
35. Other local authority codes that apply.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
B. Follow the procedures specified in mechanical Division Sections "General Conditions"
and “Special Conditions”.
C. Shop drawings shall include the minimum following information as applies. Additional
specific information required is outlined in other Mechanical Sections.
1. Certified performance and data with system operating conditions indicated
(winter and summer performance as necessary). All coil, fan, and pump
performance data shall be computer generated.
a. Submit sound power level data for all inlets, outlets, and casing radiation
at rated capacities for all air handling equipment. Provide calculated
sound power data based on AMCA 320 sound intensity test methods.
b. Where filters are included with equipment, provide data of filter media,
filter performance data, filter assembly, and filter frames.
2. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of
selected model clearly indicating, weights (shipping, installed, and operating),
furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.
3. Shop Drawings:
Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating dimensions,
weight loading, required clearances, gages and finishes of materials, and
methods of assembly of components.
4. Wiring Diagrams:
Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to

13
electrical equipment. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for
interlock and control wiring required for final installation of electrical equipment
and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-
installed and portions to be field-installed.
5. Maintenance Data:
Submit maintenance data and parts list for each mechanical equipment, control
and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this
data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual;
in accordance with requirements of mechanical division
D. Provide separate shop drawing submittals for the following items
Warranties
As-built documents
Pipe pressure test logs
Operation and maintenance manuals (electronic copies
integrated into EMCS)
Close-out / walk-through documentation
Training seminar documentation
Submittal Requirement: Date Submitted:
Flow meters
Calibrated balance valves
Pressure gauges
Thermometers
Pressure/temperature test plugs
Duct static pressure gauges
Pipe supports, anchors, sleeves, and hangers
Equipment curbs, supports, and hangers
Mechanical seals
Roof curbs and supports
Fire sealants
Vibrations controls
Mechanical identification materials

14
Valve schedule
Agency compliance documentation
Pre-balancing conference meeting documentation
Pre-balancing field deficiency report(s)
Draft TAB report
Final TAB report
Ductwork insulation materials and insulation schedule
Equipment insulation materials and insulation schedule
Pipe insulation materials and insulation schedule
Control drawings
Control materials and equipment
Sequences of operation
Points list
Variable frequency drives
Factory start-up report(s)
Fuel oil piping material and fitting schedule
Fuel oil valves
Fuel oil pipe accessories
Remote fuel fill station and alarm panel
Piping hydrostatic test report(s)
HVAC piping material and fitting schedule
HVAC valves
HVAC pipe accessories
HVAC hydrostatic test report(s)

15
HVAC specialty equipment and materials
Strainers
Air vents
Pump suction fittings
Combination pump discharge valves
Relief valves
Flexible connections
Glycol specialties
HVAC pumps
Steam and condensate piping material and fitting
schedule
Steam and condensate valves
Steam and condensate hydrostatic test report(s)
Steam and condensate specialties
Submittal Requirement: for cooling tower makeup Date Submitted:
Chemical feeder equipment
Chemical treatment materials
Chemical material safety data sheet (MSDS) information
Monthly field inspection reports
Ductwork material and schedule
Flexible ductwork
High pressure manufactured ductwork fittings
Low pressure manufactured ductwork fittings
Ductwork hangers, sealants, tapes, etc.
Ductwork connection systems
Owner approval of ductwork cleaning
Fire, smoke, and fire/smoke damper resetting
demonstration documentation
Ductwork coordination drawings
Dampers
Flexible duct connections

16
Duct access doors
Duct test hole plugs
Volume control dampers
Damper quadrants
Mixed flow fans
Power ventilators
Air terminal units and accessories
Laboratory airflow control system air valves
LACS controls
LACS miscellaneous components
Air outlets and inlets
Generator exhaust system
Grease duct system
Heat exchangers
Energy recovery wheel units
Fixed-plate sensible heat exchangers
Fixed-plate total heat exchangers
Packaged energy recovery units
Air handling units
Computer room air-conditioners

17
Computer room zone cooling distribution units
Laboratory reheat coils
Heat transfer units
Mechanical commissioning documentation
Building automation system commissioning
documentation

18
1.7 SUBSTITUTES
A. All proposals shall be based on providing and installing the materials or items of
equipment which are hereinafter specified.
1.8 Equipment Selection:
1.9 Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be
furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing. Associated
mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and
equipment spaces are to be increased accordingly, but all recommended manufacturer
clearances, etc., are to be maintained within the allotted mechanical spaces. No
additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved.
If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the
equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements.
1.10 Where the terms "or equivalent" is used, the Contractor may substitute alternate
equipment, materials, etc. subject to review by the Architect/Engineer and the
Owner’s representative during the submittal phase of the project.
1.11 Where the term "or approved equivalent" is used, the Contractor may not substitute
alternate equipment, materials, etc. unless requesting approval at least ten (10) days
before the bid date. Notifications of any such approvals by the Architect/Engineer
shall only be made in writing by Addendum.
1.12 Where the term "no equivalent" is used, the Contractor must provide the specified or
scheduled equipment, materials, etc.
1.13 Final determination regarding substitutions shall be by the Architect/Engineer.
1.14 WARRANTY
1.15 Refer to the General Conditions section of this Specification for general warranty
requirements and information. Additional warranty requirements are specified in
subsequent Mechanical Sections.
1.16 CLOSE OUT AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
1.17 Operate each system and item of equipment in a test run of appropriate duration, but
no less than 7 days, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and
correct operations as required for proper performance.
1.18 Any system placed in temporary operation for testing or for the convenience of the
Contractor during construction shall be properly maintained and operated by the
Contractor.

19
1.19 All systems shall be protected against freezing, flooding, corrosion or other forms of
damage prior to acceptance by the Owner.
1.20 Material or equipment damaged, shown to be defective or not in accordance with the
Specifications shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner’s
representative.
1.21 All tests shall be made after notification to and in the presence of the Owner’s
representative.
1.22 Before starting up any system, each piece of equipment comprising any part of the
system shall be checked for proper lubrication and any other condition which may
cause damage to the equipment or endanger personnel.
1.23 After systems have been demonstrated to be satisfactory for 7 consecutive days and
ready for permanent operation, all permanent pipe line strainers shall be cleaned,
valve and packings properly adjusted, lubrication checked and replenished if required.
Temporary piping, etc. shall be removed and openings restored in a permanent
manner acceptable to the Owner’s representative.
A. Conduct a walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel pertaining to
the continued operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment and systems.
Explain the identification system, maintenance requirements, operational diagrams,
temperature control provisions, sequencing requirements, security, safety, efficiency
and similar features of the systems. Walk through must be documented as to those
attending and subjects covered.
B. References.
C. Performance requirements.
1. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor
binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation,
and operate within + 10 percent of scheduled performance and published
operating curve.
D. Submittals.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Qualifications.
G. Delivery, storage and handling.
H. Extra materials.
Provide two set of mechanical seals and gaskets for each pump

20
Equipment Selection:
1.24 Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and ratings may be
furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing. Associated
mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and
equipment spaces are to be increased accordingly, but all recommended manufacturer
clearances, etc., are to be maintained within the allotted mechanical spaces. No
additional costs will be approved for these increases, if larger equipment is approved.
If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are specified, the
equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements.
1.25 Where the terms "or equivalent" is used, the Contractor may substitute alternate
equipment, materials, etc. subject to review by the Architect/Engineer and the
Owner’s representative during the submittal phase of the project.
1.26 Where the term "or approved equivalent" is used, the Contractor may not substitute
1.27 Where the term "no equivalent" is used, the Contractor must provide the specified or
1.28 Final determination regarding substitutions shall be by the Architect/Engineer.
1.29 WARRANTY
1.30 Refer to the General Conditions section of this Specification for general warranty
subsequent Mechanical Sections.
1.32 Operate each system and item of equipment in a test run of appropriate duration, but
1.33 Any system placed in temporary operation for testing or for the convenience of the
Contractor during construction shall be properly maintained and operated by the
Contractor.
1.34 All systems shall be protected against freezing, flooding, corrosion or other forms of

21
1.35 Material or equipment damaged, shown to be defective or not in accordance with the
representative.
1.36 All tests shall be made after notification to and in the presence of the Owner’s
representative.
1.37 Before starting up any system, each piece of equipment comprising any part of the
1.38 After systems have been demonstrated to be satisfactory for 7 consecutive days and
1.39 Conduct a walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel pertaining to
the continued operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment and systems.
attending and subjects covered. Walk through document(s) shall be signed and dated
by the contractor's representative and the owner's representative.
1. [Note to A/E: List all HVAC systems that require walk through instructional
seminar]
B. At the time of substantial project completion, turn over the prime responsibility for
operation of the mechanical equipment and systems to the Owner's operating
personnel. Until the time of final acceptance, provide full time operating personnel,
who are completely familiar with the work, to consult with and continue training the
Owner's personnel. If any systems are operated prior to substantial completion, the
contractor shall perform all necessary preventative maintenance according to all
manufacturer recommendations.
1.40 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare as-built documents in accordance with the requirements in mechanical
Division "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in above,
indicate the following installed conditions:
1. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide the Owner with as-built drawings for
ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior;
locations of dampers and other control devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units
and indicate all devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair, such as control
power transformers, LACS panels/routers, field controllers, duct static pressure

22
sensors, piping pressure sensors, etc.
2. All mechanical systems as described in the Specifications and/or shown on the
drawings.
3. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located
and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance
located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve
location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Refer to Section "Mechanical
Identification." Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground
piping.
4. Equipment/material locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from
prominent building lines.
1.41 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with mechanical division "PROJECT
CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in mechanical division, include
the following information for equipment items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,
performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature
and commercial numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping,
shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating
instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting
instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
B. Provide electronic copies, preferably in Adobe Acrobat Portable Document Format
(pdf), of all maintenance manuals to Temperature Control Contractor for use in EMCS
front-end system. Provide data in file types compatible with EMCS.
2. PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE TO PHPL PROJECT).
3. EXECUTION
3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
[Note to A/E: Revise this section as necessary to address actual project requirements]
Refer to Division Sections for general demolition requirements and procedures.

23
Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components
specified under mechanical division and as indicated on the drawings.
Controls
Demolition related to others areas that must remain on line.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make
equipment operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal
capacity and quality. Refer to insulation specifications
3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
B. Store and handle material and equipment in compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or
low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
C. Use proper lifting equipment where size/weight requires handling by such means.
D. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and moving instructions for unloading material
and equipment, and moving them to final location.
E. Equipment requiring disassembly for access purposes shall be disassembled and
reassembled as required for movement into the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Deliver material and equipment as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by
shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.
G. Mechanical Contractor shall schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time

24
requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.
3.3 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements
of the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 26 for rough-in requirements.
3.4 COORDINATION
A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
B. Coordinate the mechanical work with work of the different trades so that:
1. Interferences between mechanical, electrical, architectural, and structural work,
including existing services, will be avoided.
2. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum practicable space for
operation, maintenance repair, removal and testing of mechanical and other
equipment will be provided.
3. Pipes, ducts, and similar items, shall be kept as close as possible to ceiling, walls,
and columns, to take up a minimum amount of space. Pipes, ducts, and similar
items shall be located so that they will not interfere with the intended use of
other equipment.
C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
D. Furnish and install, without additional expense to the Owner, all offsets, fittings and
similar items necessary in order to accomplish the requirements of coordination.
3.5 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. All dimensions and clearances affecting the installation of work shall be verified in the
field in relation to established datum, to building openings and to the work of other
trades.
B. The location of all equipment and systems shall be coordinated to preclude
interferences with other construction.
C. Should interferences occur which will necessitate deviations from layout or dimensions
shown on the Drawings, the Architect/Engineer and the Owner’s representative shall
be notified and any changes approved before proceeding with the work.
D. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress

25
of construction to allow for mechanical installations.
E. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials,
and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection
for each service.
G. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,
including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the
Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements
conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect/Engineer.
H. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular
to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.
I. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for
ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend
grease fittings to an accessible location.
J. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.
K. Welding, sweating, or brazing operations
1. All cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating operations carried on in the vicinity of,
or accessible to, combustible material shall be adequately protected to make
certain that a spark or hot slag does not reach the combustible material and start
a fire.
2. When it is necessary to do cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating close to wood
construction, in pipe shafts, or other locations where combustible materials can
not be removed or adequately protected, employ fireproof blankets and proper
fire extinguishers. Position another individual nearby to guard against sparks
and fire.
3. Whenever combustible material has been exposed to molten metal or hot slag
from welding or cutting operations, or spatter from electric arc operations, a
guard shall be kept at the place of work for at least one hour after completion to
verify that smoldering fires have not been started.
4. Whenever welding or cutting operations are carried on in a vertical shaft or
where floor openings exist, a fire guard shall be employed to examine all floors
below the point of the welding or cutting operation. The fire guard shall be kept
on duty for at least one hour after completion to verify that smoldering fires

26
have not been started.
5. Before any work involving cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating operations is
started, consult with the Architect/Engineer as to particular safety precautions to
be employed on the work.
3.6 ACCESSIBILITY
A. All work shall be installed so as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair
with particular attention given to locating valves, controls and equipment requiring
periodic lubrication, cleaning, adjusting or servicing of any kind.
3.7 LUBRICATION AND TOOLS
A. Provide a fresh charge of lubricant in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations to all equipment requiring lubrication prior to start-up and maintain
lubrication as required until acceptance by Owner.
B. Provide for each piece of equipment any special tools and a list of such tools required
for the operation or adjustment of the equipment and turn over to the Owner’s
representative prior to final acceptance of the equipment.
3.8 START-UP
3.9 PIPING SYSTEMS PRESSURE TESTING
A. The following personnel in the order listed shall be considered acceptable witnesses of
all piping pressure testing:
1. Project Inspector
B. Removal of pressure charge and associated drain down shall also be witnessed.
C. Mechanical contractor shall provide a minimum of 24-hour notice to at least one of
the above listed parties before commencing any piping systems pressure test.
D. Pressure gauge requirements: Provide recently calibrated gauge with 4” face and a
range such that test pressure is between 50% and 100% of gauge range. For example,
a gauge with a 15 psig range is acceptable for a 10 psig pressure test, whereas a gauge
with a 30 psig range is unacceptable in this application. Gauge resolution shall be
suitable for type of testing, system size and test media. Gauge shall have been
recently calibrated.
E. All piping pressurizing equipment (i.e., air compressor) shall be disconnected before
test is commenced and shall remain disconnected for the entire duration of the test.

27
F. Entire system shall be properly vented before test is commenced.
G. For specific piping pressure testing requirements and procedures, see applicable piping
systems specification sections.
H. Submit completed pipe pressure test log for each pressure test before final project
closeout. Test log shall also be included in operation and maintenance manuals.
3.10 GENERAL CONTRACTOR - MECHANICAL EXTENT OF WORK
A. Access Panels
1. Furnish and install panels for access to valves and dampers and similar items
where no other means of access, such as readily removable, sectional ceiling is
shown or specified.
2. The plans indicate the location of all anticipated access panels. The mechanical
Division Contractor shall make every effort to locate all material and equipment
requiring service and maintenance above accessible ceilings or utilize the
indicated access panels. Material and equipment requiring service and
maintenance that is shown above inaccessible ceilings shall be relocated to
accessible or exposed areas whenever possible. When these items are located in
exposed areas, the mechanical Division Contractor is to verify with the
Architect/Engineer that the installation will not affect the aesthetics of the
building. However, when it is not possible to locate these items in accessible or
exposed areas due to the configuration of the actual installation of the
mechanical and other trade systems or aesthetic reasons, additional access
panels shall be provided. The contractor shall be equitably compensated for the
additional access panels.
3. Refer to Section Access Doors and Panels for specific information on type and
size of panels
B. Cutting and Patching
1. General:
Perform cutting and patching in accordance with mechanical division Section
"CUTTING AND PATCHING." In addition to the requirements specified in
mechanical division , the following requirements apply:

28
2. The mechanical division Contractor shall coordinate all cutting and patching of
holes, in existing building and new construction which are required for the
passage of mechanical work.
3. Mechanical Division Contractor is to notify the General Contractor prior to
submitting his bid, the number, size and location of all cutting and patching
requirements. The Mechanical Division Contractor shall be liable for all
associated costs of cutting and patching for mechanical work upon failure to
notify the General Contractor prior to bid submission.
4. Under no circumstances shall any structural members, load-bearing walls or
footings be cut without first obtaining written permission from the Engineer.
5. Cut, channel, chase and core drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other
surfaces necessary for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled
mechanics of the trades involved.
6. Patching of concrete openings shall be filled with grout and finished smooth with
the adjacent surface.
7. All below-grade openings for pipe shall be sealed with interlocking synthetic
rubber line assembly.
8. All penetrations through the walls, floor, or structure of laboratory spaces,
laboratory support spaces, lecture halls, classrooms, conference rooms, corridors
or other areas in which relative pressurization relationships are important shall
be sealed airtight. Refer to the drawings for additional information regarding
rooms in which maintaining pressurization is important.
9. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
10. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials
required to:
a. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
b. Remove and replace defective work.
c. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
f. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to
provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work.
C. Concrete Bases
1. Minimum 4" high concrete housekeeping pads shall be provided under floor
mounted mechanical equipment. Concrete inertia pads shall be provided for all
base-mounted pumps and air compressors installed in the penthouse area.
2. Mechanical Division Contractor is to notify the General Contractor prior to
submitting his bid, the number, size and location of all mechanical equipment
bases. The Mechanical Division Contractor shall be liable for all associated costs
to install the mechanical equipment bases upon failure to notify the General
Contractor prior to bid submission.
3. Construct concrete equipment bases a minimum 4 inches larger in both

29
directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's
setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000 psi, 28-day
compressive strength concrete, reinforcement and forms as specified in
Mechanical Division Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete." Coordinate final
equipment base size with General Contractor.
D. Roof curbs,
roof support for mechanical equipment and roof penetrations.
1. Mechanical Division Contractor is to coordinate with the General Contractor all
roof curb and roof supports supplied, number, size and location of all roof
penetrations. All major roof penetrations are shown on the architectural roof
plan. General Contractor shall be notified of all additional roof penetrations
provided by the Mechanical Division Contractor not shown on this plan. The
General Contractor shall provide all roof deck mounted equipment and pipe
supports, pipe penetrations and cut roof deck for pipe and duct penetrations,
unless noted otherwise. The Mechanical Division Contractor shall furnish all
roof curbs and the General Contractor shall install, unless noted otherwise. The
mechanical Division Contractor shall provide all roof covering/membrane
mounted equipment and pipe supports and roof drains, unless noted otherwise.
2. The Division Contractor shall be liable for all associated costs to install the roof
curbs, roof supports and roof penetrations not shown on the roof plan or added
after the roof system has been installed. Coordinate with the General
Contractor prior to construction the number size and location of all roof
penetrations.
3. Mechanical Division Contractor is to coordinate with the General Contractor all
roof curb and roof supports supplied, number, size and location of all roof
penetrations. All major roof penetrations are shown on the architectural roof
plan. General Contractor shall be notified of all additional roof penetrations
provided by the mechanical division Contractor not shown on this plan.
E. Painting
1. The General Contractor is to field paint mechanical equipment and materials in
specified areas as noted on the mechanical plans, mechanical schedules and in
the specifications. Division Contractor is to coordinate the painting of these
items with the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor is to provide
materials in these areas that are suitable for accepting paint. The clean and
preparation of the materials to reach paint is the responsibility of the General
Contractor unless noted specifically to be responsibility of the Division
Contractor.
2. In concealed locations, field-fabricated bare iron or steel items required for
installation of work under this Division shall have rough or sharp edges removed
and shall be painted with one coat of zinc rich paint.
3. In exposed locations, field-fabricated bare iron or steel items required for

30
and shall be painted in accordance.
3.11 ELECTRICAL-MECHANICAL EXTENT OF WORK
A. The responsibility of work specified under mechanical Division is clarified under,
"Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment. mechanical division Contractor is
to coordinate all electrical requirements prior to ordering powered mechanical
equipment.

31
PUMPS
GENERAL
3.1SECTION INCLUDES
B. in-line centrifugal pumps.
C. end-suction centrifugal pumps.
D. Condensate end suction pumps.
3.12 REFERENCE SECTION
A. Performance requirements.
1. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor
binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation,
and operate within + 10 percent of scheduled performance and published
operating curve.
B. Submittals.
C. Operation and maintenance data.
D. Qualifications.
E. Delivery, storage and handling.
F. Extra materials.
1. Provide one set of mechanical seals and gaskets for each pump.
4.2 PRODUCTS DETAILS
G. in-line centrifugal pumps.
H. end-suction centrifugal pumps.
I. Condensate end suction pumps
4.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
4. EXECUTION

32
4.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
4.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Provide automatic condensate pump unit at each location where gravity drainage is
not possible. Coordinate with other trades.
D. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
E. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or
base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge
line sizes 4 inches and over.
F. Provide line sized shut-off valve and pump suction fitting, flexible connection on pump
suction, and line sized soft seat check valve, balancing valve, flexible connection and
line sized shut-off valve on pump discharge. Refer to piping schematics and details.
G. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
H. Install base mounted pumps on concrete housekeeping base, with anchor bolts, set
and level, and grout in place. Refer to Section concerned.
I. Provide pump suction fitting on suction side of base mounted centrifugal pumps.
Remove temporary strainers after cleaning systems.
J. Support pump fittings with floor mounted pipe and flange supports.
K. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to pumps.
L. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump
nozzles.
4.3 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
A. Start-up pump in accordance to manufacturer written instructions.
B. Before and after start-up, perform the following preventative maintenance operations
and checks:

33
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Check, align and certify alignment of base mounted pumps prior to start-up.
3. After pump is started, check for proper rotation, proper mechanical operation
and motor load to ensure that pump is not overloaded. Close pump balancing
valve as required to bring pump motor load within motor nameplate data.
4. Check pumps to ensure it is not air bound or cavitating.
5. After sufficient run time, remove, check and clean strainer as required. Repeat
cleaning strainer until system is sufficiently flushed. Refer to Section 23 25 00,
Chemical Water Treatment.
6. After completing start-up, replace pump strainer with permanent strainer.
C. Coordinate pump testing, adjusting and balancing with UNL Balancing / Commissioning
Team. Complete additional preliminary work as required.
HVAC Hydronic piping syatem
5. GENERAL
[Note: Edit following section to include/exclude actual project hydronic systems]
A. Above grade pipe, fittings, and joints for:
1. Heating water piping systems.
2. Chilled water piping systems.
3. Heat pump water piping systems.
4. Heat recovery water piping systems.
5. Equipment drains and overflows.
6. Process cooling water systems.
B. Valves.
5.2 REFERENCE SECTION FOR THE FOLLOWING:
A. Quality assurance.
B. References.
C. Submittals.
D. Operation and maintenance manuals.
E. Project record documents.
1. Record actual locations of valves.

34
F. Delivery, storage, and handling.
5.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components
are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized.
Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing
are consistently provided.
B. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or
apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves,
equipment or other apparatus.
C. Where connecting ferrous and non-ferrous piping materials, use full-port ball valves
with bronze construction or a galvanized steel dielectric nipples with plastic liner to
separate piping materials.
D. Use gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of
systems, or vertical risers or as shown on plans.
E. Use ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services or as
shown on plans.
F. Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.
5.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to International Mechanical Code for installation of piping system.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state and
local labor regulations.
C. Welders shall be certified using AWS testing methods. .
5.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
5.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two repacking kits for each size and valve type.
6. PRODUCTS
6.1 STEEL PIPING, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS
A. Applicable Systems

35
1. Heating water
2. Chilled water
3. Heat recovery water
4. Condenser water
5. Heat pump water
B. Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black steel.
C. Fittings (2” and smaller): Malleable Iron: ASTM B16.3, Class 150, threaded or Cast
Iron: ASTM B16.4, Class 125, threaded.
D. Fittings (2-1/2” and larger):
1. ASTM B16.9, steel butt weld fittings. Bushings are not permitted, use standard
reducing fittings.
E. Joints (2” and smaller): Threaded. Joint compound must be rated for propylene glycol
usage.
F. Joints (2-1/2” and larger):
1. AWS D1.1, welded.
G. Branch Tees: Weld-O-Lets and Thread-O-Lets are acceptable for branch piping when
main piping is 1" or larger than branch piping.
H. Saddle Tees: Are acceptable for branch piping when main piping is 2" or larger than
branch piping.
I. Unions (2” and smaller): 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.
J. Flanges (2-1/2” and larger): 150 psig forged steel, slip-on, 1/16 inch thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
K. Steel (ferrous) piping, fittings and equipment shall not be used in process cooling
water systems.
6.2 COPPER TUBING, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS
A. Applicable Systems
1. Heating water
2. Chilled water
3. Heat recovery water
4. Condenser water
5. Heat pump water
6. Equipment drains and overflows
B. Pipe: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn

36
C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type DWV, hard drawn piping on equipment drains and
overflows only.
D. Fittings and Unions (2” and smaller): ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze:
1. Solder filler metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys.
2. Flux: ASTM B813, water-flushable.
E. Joints (All sizes):
1. Copper to copper: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP-5 (15% silver), Copper-phosphorus
alloy.
2. Copper to bronze or steel: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BAg-1, Silver alloy (45% silver), non-
corrosive flux.
F. Flanges (2-1/2” and larger): Bronze, 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.
6.3 DIELECTRIC NIPPLE
A. Electroplated steel nipple, complying with ASTM F 1545 and IAPMO PS 66.
1. Rated for 300 psig at 225 deg F.
2. Male threaded or grooved end connections.
3. Inert and noncorrosive propylene lining.
6.4 VALVES
A. CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVES
1. Pre-Set Balance Feature. Valves to be designed to allow Installing Contractor to
pre-set balance points for proportional system balance prior to system start-up
in accordance with scheduled flow rates.
2. Valve Design and Construction. All valves shall have a calibrated orifice or
venturi section, two ¼” threaded pressure tap ports with integral seals, and
memory stop to retain the set position. Valves should be rated for 125 psig
working pressure and 250 Deg. F maximum operating temperature.
3. Valves shall be selected based on flowrate, not on pipe size dimensions.
4. Preformed Insulation. All valves to be provided with molded insulation to permit
access for balance and read-out.
B. GATE VALVES
1. Up To and Including 2 Inches:
a. Bronze body, bronze trim, union bonnet, rising stem, lockshield stem
handwheel, inside screw with backseating stem, solid wedge disc, alloy
seat rings, solder or threaded ends, Class 125, MSS SP-80. Add valve stem
extensions to all valves that will be installed in insulated piping systems.
2. Over 2 Inches:
a. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside
screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged or

37
grooved ends, Class 125, MSS SP-70. Add valve stem extensions to all
valves that will be installed in insulated piping systems.
b. Chainwheel: On valves 6” and larger and installed higher than 8-feet
above finished floor, provide sprocket rim, brackets, and chain compatible
with valve.
C. BALL VALVES
a. Bronze two piece body, stainless steel full-port ball on all systems, “glass
filled” Teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle with balancing stops,
solder or threaded ends. Include stem extensions on valves used in
insulated piping systems.
b. Energy isolation ball valves shall be provided with lockable handle.
D. BUTTERFLY VALVES
1. 2-1/2 Inches and Larger:
a. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, lug ends,
extended neck.
b. Disc: Aluminum bronze on closed systems and stainless steel on open
systems.
c. Stem: Stainless steel, extended on insulated systems as required to allow
valve operation without damage to the insulation.
d. Operator (4” and smaller): 10 position lever handle with memory stop,
gear drive.
e. Operator (6” and larger): Handwheel, gear drive.
f. Chainwheel: On valves 6” and larger and installed higher than 8-feet
above finished floor, provide sprocket rim, brackets, and chain compatible
with valve.
E. SWING CHECK VALVES
a. Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with composition
disc, solder or threaded ends.
2. Over 2 Inches:
a. Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc,
renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
F. SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
1. Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring, resilient
seal bonded to body, wafer or threaded lug ends.
G. ALTERNATE MATERIALS

38
1. Process cooling water systems are to be constructed entirely of materials that do
not contain ferrous compounds, except that stainless steel pipe and fittings may
be used.
7. EXECUTION
7.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter using tools designed for this purpose.
Remove burrs. Bevel or groove plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations with
grooved mechanical joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.)
E. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary
plugs or caps.
7.2 INSTALLATION
A. Where connecting ferrous and non-ferrous piping materials, use full-port ball valves
with bronze construction or a galvanized steel dielectric nipples with plastic liner to
separate piping materials.
B. Heating water connections to terminal units shall be copper (no steel).
C. Install all piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.
D. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
E. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
G. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors as follows:
1. Install schedule 40 pipe sleeves at fire rated walls and floors. Seal with UL
approved fire stopping material as specified
2. Install minimum 18 gage pipe sleeves at non rated walls.
3. Sleeves through floors should extend a minimum of 2” above finished floor.
4. Sleeves through walls should be flush with the wall surface.
5. All sleeves should be large enough to has insulated piping with crushing the
insulation.
H. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.

39
I. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
J. Refer to Section for installation of supports and hangers.
K. Provide insulation clearance and access to valves and fittings in hangers and from
structure and other equipment. Insulation shall be continuous through all hangers
and supports. Refer to Section
L. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and
location of access doors with General Contractor and requirements of Section
M. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to
maintain top of pipe level.
N. Install unions on both sides of each control valve and on one side of all other valves.
Install unions on the equipment side of final connections to each piece of equipment.
Unions are not required at flanged valves or equipment or equipment or in grooved
joint piping systems.
O. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
P. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting.
Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
R. Provide insulated valve stem extensions on all valves installed in insulated piping
systems.
S. Install chainwheel operators on valves 4” and larger that are installed 8-feet above
finished floor or greater. Extend chain down to maximum 5-feet above finished floor.
T. Pipe connections shall be installed with the branch piping connected to the top of the
main/header. If this is not possible due to space constraints, a connection with the
same vertical centerline is acceptable. Connections to the bottom of the main/header
is not allowed.
U. Hydronic systems shall be designed and constructed with isolation valves at branch
taps for all floors.
V. Provide solid chrome plated steel escutcheons cover the sleeves and openings at walls
and ceilings in exposed areas.

40
W. Process cooling water systems are to be constructed entirely of non-ferrous materials,
including but not limited to, piping, pumps, filters, heat exchangers, valves, and air
separators. The exception to this is that stainless steel pipe and fittings may be used.
7.3 SYSTEM FLUSHING, FILLING, PRESSURE TESTING AND CLEANING
A. Flush, fill, pressure test and clean all new hydronic systems and parts of existing
systems which have been altered, extended or repaired.
B. Flush and fill systems with all valves open to coils. Bleed air from coils and piping.
Clean strainers. Refer to Section .
C. Pressure Test Procedure:
1. Submit copy of pipe pressure test log for each section of piping tested. Refer to
sec- for general pipe pressure testing requirements (i.e., test pressure gages,
inspections, etc.).
2. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the
test.
3. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the
reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate
expansion joints from testing.
4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the
piping. If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of
sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at
which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test
pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of
overpressure during the test.
6. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the
system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not
exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component
in the system under test.
After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 12 hours, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or
replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no
leaks
HVAC STEAM AND CONDENSTE PIPING
A. fittings for:
1. Interior steam, condensate, and blowdown piping.

41
B. Valves
A. References.
B. Submittals.
C. Project record documents.
D. Operation and maintenance data.
E. Qualifications.
F. Delivery, storage and handling.
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system
components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is
not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and
couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
B. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or
apparatus connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to
valves, equipment or other apparatus.
C. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals.
D. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM B31.9 and MSS
SP69 unless indicated otherwise.
E. Use gate or ball as shown on plans.
A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state
and local labor regulations.
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating
approval of welders.

42
8. PRODUCTS
8.1 STEAM PIPING AND STEAM VENTS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, Grade B seamless, black.
1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, Class 150, Schedule 40, cast iron, threaded (2” and
smaller); ASTM A234, ANSI B16.9, butt welding carbon steel fittings, Schedule 40,
standard weight (2-1/2” and larger). All elbows shall be long radius type unless
otherwise noted.
2. Joints: Threaded (2” and smaller), or AWS D1.1, welded (2-1/2” and larger).
8.2 STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 80, Type B seamless, black.
1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, Class 150 extra heavy weight, malleable iron; ASTM A234
forged steel welding type fittings class 125, extra heavy weight.
8.3 BLOWDOWN PIPING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 80, Type B seamless, black.
1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, Class 150 extra heavy weight, malleable iron; ASTM A234
forged steel welding type fittings class 125, extra heavy weight.
8.4 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under:
1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.
B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches:
1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on.
2. Provide flange gaskets suitable for steam pressure class.
C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,
copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier.
8.5 BALL VALVES
A. Up To and Including 1-1/2 Inches:
1. Carbon steel three piece body, 150 psi saturated steam, pressure-balanced
stainless steel full port ball, stainless steel trim and hardware, teflon seats and
packing, lever handle with locking stops, socket weld ends, Apollo 83A-240 or

43
equivalent. Add valve stem extensions to all valves that will be installed in
insulated piping systems.
8.6 GATE VALVES
A. Up To and Including 2 Inches:
1. Bronze body, bronze trim, union bonnet, rising stem, lockshield stem handwheel,
inside screw with backseating stem, solid wedge disc, alloy seat rings, solder or
threaded ends, union on one end, Class 150. Add valve stem extensions to all
valves that will be installed in insulated piping systems.
B. Over 2 Inches:
1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, outside stem and yoke, handwheel,
outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, flanged or
grooved ends, Class 150.
2. Chainwheel: On valves 4” and larger and installed higher than 8-feet above
finished floor ,provide sprocket rim, brackets, and chain compatible with valve.
Add valve stem extensions to all valves that will be installed in insulated piping
systems.
8.7 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Up To and Including 2 Inches:
1. Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with composition disc,
solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches:
1. Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc, renewable
disc and seat, flanged ends.
8.8 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES
A. Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring, resilient
seal bonded to body, wafer or threaded lug ends.
9. EXECUTION
9.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with

44
temporary plugs or caps.
9.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install steam and condensate piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain
gradient.
D. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,
joints, or connected equipment.
G. Refer to Section concerend for installation of supports and hangers.
H. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for
installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to section.
I. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers
to maintain bottom of pipe level.
J. Install unions on both sides of each control valve and on one side of all other
valves. Install unions at final connections to each piece of equipment. Unions
are not required at flanged valves or equipment.
K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
L. Install chainwheel operators on valves 4” and larger that are installed 8-feet
above finished floor or greater. Extend chain down to maximum 5-feet above
finished floor.
M. Drip legs shall be the same size as the line to which they are connecting (for pipe
sizes 4” and under). For pipe sizes 6” and greater, drip legs shall be ½ the size
of the line to which they are connecting, but no less than 4”.
N. Steam pipe connections shall be made to the top of the supply pipe to which
they are connecting. Use 45-degree elbows in lieu of 90-degree elbows where
possible. Install shutoff valve at connection to main.
9.3 SYSTEM FLUSHING, FILLING, PRESSURE TESTING AND CLEANING
A. Flush, fill, pressure test and clean all new steam systems and parts of existing

45
systems which have been altered, extended or repaired. Cleaning procedure
shall include the use of a degreasing agent.
B. Flush and fill systems. Clean strainers.
C. Pressure Test Procedure:
1. Submit copy of Pipe Pressure Test Log provided in section of testing for each
section of piping tested. Refer to section for general pipe pressure testing
requirements (i.e., test pressure gages, inspections, etc.).
2. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the
test.
3. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the
reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate
expansion joints from testing.
4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the
piping. If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of
sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at
which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test
pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of
overpressure during the test.
6. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure in which at every point in
the system is not less than 125 psig. The test pressure shall not exceed the
maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the
system under test.
7. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 12 hours,
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by
tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat
hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
D. Clean systems. Refer to Section for cleaning procedure.
HVAC HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
10. GENERAL
A. Expansion tanks.

46
B. Air vents.
C. Air/Dirt separators.
D. Strainers.
E. Relief valves.
F. Flexible connections.
G. Glycol feeder.(if applicable)
H. Glycol solution(if applicable)
I. Terminal unit coil hookup packages including hose kits and automatic flow limiters.
A. References.
B. Submittals.
C. Project record documents
1. Record actual locations of hydronic specialties.
D. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1. Furnish service and maintenance of glycol system for one year from date of
substantial completion.
2. Monthly visit to make glycol fluid concentration analysis on site with refractive
index measurement instrument. Detail findings with maintenance personnel in
writing of corrective actions needed including analysis and amounts of glycol or
water added.
3. Provide full laboratory analysis of fluid at 6 months and 12 months from the date
of substantial completion.
E. QUALIFICATIONS
F. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
11. PRODUCTS
11.1 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME SEC VIII, ,
rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with flexible, replaceable, butyl rubber bladder
sealed into tank and steel support stand.

47
B. Accessories: Pressure gauge and air-charging fitting, tank drain.
11.2 AIR VENTS
A. Manual Type: Short vertical sections of 2 inch diameter pipe to form air chamber, with
1/8inch brass needle valve at top of chamber.
B. High Capacity Float Type:
1. Brass or semi-steel body, copper, polypropylene, or solid non-metallic float,
stainless steel valve and valve seat; suitable for system operating temperature
and pressure; with isolating valve.
2. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system
operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.
C. Washer Type:
1. Brass with hygroscopic fiber discs, vent ports, adjustable cap for manual shut-off,
and integral spring loaded ball check valve.
11.3 AIR/DIRT SEPARATORS
A. Air/Dirt Separators:
1. Basis of Design: .
2. Steel construction, rated for 150 psig, and entering velocity not to exceed 10 feet
per second at specified water flow rate.
3. Unit shall be capable of removing 100% of the free air, 100% of the entrained air,
and up to 99.6% of the dissolved air in the system.
4. Dirt separation shall be at least 80% of all particles 30 micron or larger within
100 passes.
5. Internal bundle filling the entire vessel consisting of a copper core tube with
continuous wound copper medium permanently affixed to the core. A separate
copper medium is to be wound completely around and permanently affixed to
the internal element. Each eliminator shall have a separate venting chamber to
prevent system contaminants from harming the float and venting valve
operation. At the top of the venting chamber shall be an integral full port float
actuated brass venting mechanism. Units shall include a valved side tap to flush
floating dirt or liquids and for quick bleeding of large amounts of air during
system fill or refill. Separator shall have the vessel extended below the pipe
connections an equal distance for dirt separation. Bottom connection for use as
a blowdown.
6. Integral mounting lugs on large units (14” and larger) for use with contractor-
provided mounting legs.
11.4 STRAINERS
A. Size 2 inch and Under:

48
1. Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 1/32
inch Type 304 stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch:
1. Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch Type
304 stainless steel perforated screen.
C. Size 5 inch and Larger:
1. Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch
Type 304 stainless steel perforated screen.
D. Provide blow down valves where shown on plan.
11.5 SAFETY RELIEF VALVES
A. Cast iron or Bronze body, EPDM seat, brass internal parts, automatic, direct pressure
actuated, capacities ASME certified and labeled.
11.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:
1. Body: Peroxide-cured EPDM synthetic rubber and Kelvar tire cord
reinforcement.
2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel
flanges.
3. Control Rods: Steel with oversized washers and rubber bushings.
4. Performance: Capable of misalignment.
5. CWP Rating: 150 psig.
6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
7. Manufacturer: Mason Industries model Safeflex or equivalent.
B. Stainless steel braided connection with steel flange rated for 225 psig and 16" Hg
vacuum. Operating temperature 20 degrees F. to 240 degrees F.
C. Minimum allowable movement shall be as follows:
Lateral Deflection 1/2"
Elongation 3/8"
Compression 1/2"
Angular Deflection 15 degrees
11.7 GLYCOL FEEDER
A. Mixing Tank: 55 gallon polyethylene drum with hinged cover. Fully supported by a
carbon steel bottom mount stand, painted with water based enamel.

49
B. Control Panel: NEMA 4X with 2-position main power switch and light, 3-position,
hand-off-auto, switch and light for gear pump, red low light and 15 A fuse.
C. Low Level Switch: Polypropylene side entry low level switch with 10 A relay.
D. Gear Pump: Includes PVC ball valve, flexible tubing and cast iron Y-strainer. Pump
discharge tubing includes brass construction spring check valve, PVC piping, and ¼”
NPT back tap pressure gauge.
E. Pressure Switch: ¼” NPT
F. Pressure Relief Valves: 50-250 PSI brass valve
11.8 GLYCOL SOLUTION
[Note to A/E: Edit glycol percentages based on project needs. Provide percentage
schedule if multiple hydronic systems are involved]
A. Inhibited propylene glycol and water solution mixed [50] percent glycol - [50] percent
water, suitable for operating temperatures from [-40] degrees F to 250 degrees F.
11.9 TERMINAL UNIT COIL HOOKUP
A. The components specified in this section shall be installed on the following devices:
1. Air terminal unit reheat coils.
2. Fintubes
3. Unit heaters
4. Cabinet unit heaters
5. Fan coils
6. Radiant ceiling panels
7. Chilled beams
8. Small (1-5 Ton), unitary, water source heat pumps.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Griswold
2. Pro Hydronics
3. Flow Design
4. Nexus
C. Piping package components
1. Automatic flow limiter
a. Shall have the capability to measure flow.
b. Automatic flow limiting cartridge(s) will be made of stainless steel. No
brass or plastic components allowed.
c. Flow rate accuracy will be +/- 5% of design flow rate.
d. Shall be of a pressure independent, clog resistant design.

50
e. Valve cartridge shall have a single spring range of 3-50 psid.
f. Cartridges shall be easily removable from valve body without disturbing
existing piping.
2. Wye-strainers
a. Strainers shall have a 20 mesh rating. Strainers shall have at minimum an
8:1 ratio of total area vs. internal pipe diameter.
b. The strainer screen shall be constructed of stainless steel.
c. The strainer shall be removable without disturbing existing piping.
d. The strainer shall be provided with blow-down valve with hose end
connection and cap.
3. Valves
a. Shall have a full-port ball.
b. Shall have a blow-out proof stem with renewable o-ring and Teflon stem
seals.
4. Stainless steel braided hoses
a. Hose liners .
b. Hoses shall be factory built and incorporate stainless steel ferrules.
c. Hoses shall withstand working pressures of at least 200psi at 200degF.
d. Hoses shall be equipped with one swivel end to allow for equipment
movement.
5. Package to include the following in order of flow;
a. Supply side: Isolation valve, y type strainer with blow down with pressure
temperature test ports, union, stainless steel braided hose.
b. Return side: Stainless steel braided hose, union, prep for owner provided
automatic control valve, union, automatic flow limiter with pressure
temperature test ports, isolation valve.
12. EXECUTION
12.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on
drawings.
B. Provide manual air vents at all system high points and in accessible locations. Provide
automatic air vents where shown on drawings / details.
C. Provide drain valves at all low points and in accessible locations.
D. Provide heat trap piping arrangement for all expansion tanks as shown on drawings or
per manufacturer instructions.

51
E. Provide appropriately sized structural supports for air/dirt separators. Support
air/dirt separator independently of piping system for larger sizes per manufacturer’s
instruction.
F. Terminal unit coil piping packages shall be supported from structure within 12” of the
assembly to prevent stress on the coil piping.
G. Terminal unit coil piping packages will be fully accessible and located within 2’ of the
terminal unit served and will be within 2’ of the ceiling line height.
H. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.
I. Triple-duty valves are not allowed. Provide separate shut-off, check valve, venturi
flow measuring device, and balancing valve.
J. Provide flexible connectors on pump suction and discharge.
K. Provide flexible connectors on all pipe connections that serve vibration isolated
mechanical equipment.
L. Provide full-size piping from relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain. In glycol
systems, provide full-size piping from relief valve to glycol feeder or catch tank.
M. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of
individual vent areas.
N. Clean and flush glycol system before adding glycol solution. .
O. Feed glycol solution to system through glycol feeder make-up line with pressure
regulator, venting system high points.
P. Perform tests determining strength of glycol and water solution and submit written
test results.
Q. Alignment-Guide and Anchor Installation
1. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and
torsional stress. Coordinate with expansion joint manufacturer
recommendations as required.
2. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.
3. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted
by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected
equipment.
4. Anchor Attachments:
a. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME
B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding
and Brazing Qualifications."

52
b. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and
bars. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
c. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.
d. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners.
Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.
Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
13. GENERAL
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
1. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less in accordance
with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.
B. References.
C. Submittals.
F. Environmental requirements
1. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of
adhesives, mastics, and insulation cements.
2. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24
hours.

53
14. PRODUCTS
14.1 GLASS FIBER
A. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'k' ((btu*in)/(hr*ft2
*deg F)) value : ASTM C335
Temperature (degrees
F)
Maximum 'k' value (btu*in)/(hr*ft2
*deg F))
75 0.23
100 0.24
150 0.25
200 0.28
300 0.34
400 0.42
500 0.51
2. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 1000 degrees F.
4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2% by volume.
B. Vapor Barrier Jacket
1. ASTM C1136, White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminized film.
2. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perms.
3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
C. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A compliant. Compatible
with insulation. VOC Limit 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
D. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. VOC Limit 70 g/L
(multipurpose construction adhesive).
E. Fibrous Glass Fabric: Cloth, untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight with 1.0 lb/cu ft density
blanket.
F. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation,
white color. VOC Limit 50 g/L.
14.2 CELLULAR FOAM

54
A. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded or sheet.
1. 'k' ((btu*in)/(hr*ft2
*deg F)) value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.22 to 0.28 at 60
degrees F.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -20 degrees F.
4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: ASTM C209; 0.2 percent by volume.
5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.08 perm inches.
6. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25.
7. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50.
8. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
9. Provide documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.
10. Fittings: Pre-fabricated closed cell fittings of like material and thickness as
adjacent pipe insulation.
11. In all exposed finished areas without jacketing, provide white insulation,
otherwise use black.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I, compliant. Air dried,
contact adhesive, compatible with insulation. VOC Limit: 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
14.3 INSULATION BLANKETS FOR STEAM AND CONDENSATE FLANGED VALVES AND
EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Insulation: Tight-fitting, reusable insulation blanket consisting of high-density
insulation (fiberglass, mineral wool, ceramic fiber) covered on outside with coated
glass fabric having heavy adjustable straps with buckles. Inside of blanket shall be
covered with fabric suitable to specified temperature of stainless steel square mesh
woven wire cloth. Insulation shall be a minimum of 1-1/2” thick and shall be suitable
for temperatures up to 500 Deg. F.
14.4 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic
1. Jacket: ASTM C921, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material,
white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm inches.
d. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25.
e. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50.
f. Thickness: 20 mil.
g. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive or pressure sensitive color
matching vinyl tape.

55
2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation and PVC jacket. VOC Limit
50 g/L according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
15. EXECUTION
15.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
15.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Painting of cellular foam insulation is not allowed.
C. On exposed piping, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. For
cellular foam insulation tape ALL visible seams with tape matching insulation color.
D. Fiberglass insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below
ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory applied or field applied.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, flanges, unions, strainers, flexible connectors, and valves
with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. PVC or
aluminum covers are required in all exposed locations as in mechanical rooms.
3. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive.
4. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe
penetrations.
5. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
E. Cellular foam insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below
1. Insulate fittings, joints, flanges, unions, strainers, flexible connectors, and valves
with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. PVC or
aluminum covers are required in all exposed locations as in mechanical rooms.
penetrations.
3. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible
connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints.
F. Fiberglass insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness
as adjoining pipe. PVC covers are required in all exposed locations.

56
3. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive.
penetrations.
5. For hot piping conveying fluids, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment,
but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
6. For steam and condensate piping, insulate flanges and unions.
G. Inserts and Shields:
1. Refer to Section for additional information.
2. Application: Piping 1 inch diameter or larger.
3. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
4. Insert Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
5. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.
6. Insert Material: ASTM C640 cork, hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other
heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.
7. Provide inserts and/or shields per manufacturer recommendations for cellular
foam insulation applications in order to maintain continuous insulation
throughout the pipe system. The removal of sections of cellular foam insulation
to accommodate pipe supports is not acceptable. Manufacturer products
specifically designed for supporting insulation and maintaining the integrity of
the insulation system at pipe hanger locations, such Armaflex Armafix Insulation
Pipe Hangers, are acceptable.
H. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
I. For pipe exposed below 6 feet above finished floor, finish with PVC jacket and PVC
fitting covers. This includes all spaces including mechanical rooms.
J. All valves in insulated systems shall have valve stem extensions. Insulation installer
shall notify the contractor and Owner if valves without stem extensions are
encountered. All valves without stem extensions in areas where stem extensions are
required shall be replaced.
K. Install insulation blanket on steam and condensate valves.
L. Provide insulation clearance and access to valves and fittings in hangers and from
structure and other equipment. Insulation shall be continuous through all hangers
and supports. Refer to Section
M. Foam or closed cell insulation on black or galvanized iron pipe operating below
ambient temperature is not permitted.
15.3 GLASS FIBER INSULATION SCHEDULE

57
PIPING SYSTEM: PIPE SIZE: THICKNESS:
Heating Water Supply and Return 1-1/2" & smaller 1-1/2"
Heating Water Supply and Return 2" & larger 2"
Chilled Water All sizes 1”
Heat Recovery Water All sizes 1”
Air Terminal Unit Reheat Coil Return Bends 1” & smaller 1-1/2”
Steam & Steam Condensate 1-1/2” & smaller 1-1/2”
Steam & Steam Condensate 2" & larger 3"
Condensate Pump Steam Vent All sizes 1-1/2”
Steam Vent All sizes 1-1/2”
Piping Exposed to Freezing w/ Heat Tracing All sizes 1”
(Provide with stainless steel metal jacket in
outside conditions)
15.4 CELLULAR FOAM INSULATION SCHEDULE
PIPING SYSTEM: PIPE SIZE: THICKNESS:
Cold Condensate Drains (below ambient) All sizes 1"
Refrigerant Suction Line All sizes 1”
Refrigerant Liquid Line (in spaces
120 degrees and greater) All sizes 1”
Fan Coil Unit Condensate All sizes 1”
Chilled Water / Heat Recovery Coil Return Bends All sizes 1"

58
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
GENERAL
A. Equipment insulation.
B. Covering.
C. Breeching insulation
15.6 REFERENCE SECTION:
A. References
B. Submittals
16. GENERAL
A. Equipment insulation.
B. Covering.
C. Breeching insulati
D. References
E. Submittals
F. Quality Assurance
1. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with
ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.
G. Delivery, Storage and Handling
H. Environmental Requirements
hours.
17. PRODUCTS

59
17.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.
1. 'K' ('ksi') value: ASTM C335, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.
3. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
4. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
5. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft.
1. ASTM C921, kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminized film.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm.
C. Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch
centers.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: compatible with insulation.
E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on
mineral wool.
17.2 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible.
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.
3. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
C. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
D. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on
mineral wool.
17.3 CELLULAR FOAM

60
1. 'K' ('ksi') value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.27 at 75
degrees F.
2. Minimum service temperature: -40 degrees F.
4. Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D1056; 1.0 percent (pipe) by volume, 1.0
percent (sheet) by volume.
5. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.20 perm inches.
6. Maximum flame spread: ASTM E84; 25.
7. Maximum smoke developed: ASTM E84; 50.
B. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried, contact adhesive, compatible with insulation.
17.4 CANVAS JACKET
A. Fabric: ASTM C921, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant
lagging adhesive.
B. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
18. EXECUTION
18.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
18.2 INSTALLATION
B. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.
C. On exposed equipment, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation.
Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Insulated dual temperature equipment or cold equipment containing fluids below

61
3. Insulate entire system.
G. For insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature:
H. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field
applied.
2. For hot equipment containing fluids do not insulate flanges and unions, but
bevel and seal ends of insulation.
I. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or
larger.
2. Shields: galvanized steel between hangers and
inserts.
3. Insert location: between support shield and equipment and under the
finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as
5. Insert material: ASTM C640 cork, hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other
J. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
K. For equipment in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces, finish with
canvas jacket sized for finish covering.
L. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around
such labeling.
M. Install insulation for equipment requiring access for maintenance, repair, or cleaning,
in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.
18.3 TOLERANCE
A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at
normal conditions, as materials indicated.
[Note to A/E: Edit Equipment Insulation Schedules as necessary to suit project
requirements]
18.4 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Heating Systems
Equipment: Thickness (inches):

62
Heat exchangers/converters 2"
Air separators 1"
Steam pressure reducing valve 2”
18.5 GLASS FIBER, RIGID INSULATION SCHEDULE
Air handling units air handling unit section
(if not factory insulated) 1-1/2"
Cooling system air separators 1-1/2”
Cooling systems pump bodies 1-1/2"
Cooling system suction diffusers and triple duty valves 1-1/2”
Cooling systems flanged strainer bodies. 1-1/2"
Cooling system expansion tanks 1-1/2”
Condensate drain pans 1-1/2Quality
Assurance

63
1. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with
ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.
B. Delivery, Storage and Handling
C. Environmental Requirements
hours.
19. PRODUCTS
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.
1. ASTM C921, kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminized film.
C. Tie Wire: 18 gage stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: compatible with insulation.
E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
A. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible.

64
C. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
D. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
19.3 CELLULAR FOAM
1. 'K' ('ksi') value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.27 at 75 degrees F.
2. Minimum service temperature: -40 degrees F.
4. Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D1056; 1.0 percent (pipe) by volume, 1.0
percent (sheet) by volume.
5. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.20 perm inches.
6. Maximum flame spread: ASTM E84; 25.
7. Maximum smoke developed: ASTM E84; 50.
19.4 CANVAS JACKET
A. Fabric: ASTM C921, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant
lagging adhesive.
B. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
20. EXECUTION
20.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.
20.2 INSTALLATION
B. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.
C. On exposed equipment, locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation.
Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.

65
E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth
surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.
F. Insulated dual temperature equipment or cold equipment containing fluids below
3. Insulate entire system.
G. For insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature:
H. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory applied or field
applied.
2. For hot equipment containing fluids do not insulate flanges and unions, but
bevel and seal ends of insulation.
3.
I. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: equipment 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.
3. Insert location: between support shield and equipment and under the finish
jacket.
4. Insert configuration: minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as
5. Insert material: ASTM C640 cork, hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other
J. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
K. For equipment in mechanical equipment rooms or in finished spaces, finish with
canvas jacket sized for finish covering.
L. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around
such labeling.
M. Install insulation for equipment requiring access for maintenance, repair, or cleaning,
in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.
20.3 TOLERANCE
A. Substituted insulation materials shall provide thermal resistance within 10 percent at
normal conditions, as materials indicated.
[Note to A/E: Edit Equipment Insulation Schedules as necessary to suit project
requirements]

66
20.4 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Heating Systems
Heat exchangers/converters 2"
Air separators 1"
Steam pressure reducing valve 2”
20.5 GLASS FIBER, RIGID INSULATION SCHEDULE
Air handling units air handling unit section
(if not factory insulated) 1-1/2"
Cooling system air separators 1-1/2”
Cooling systems pump bodies 1-1/2"
Cooling system suction diffusers and triple duty valves 1-1/2”
Cooling systems flanged strainer bodies. 1-1/2"
Cooling system expansion tanks 1-1/2”
Condensate drain pans 1-1/2”

67
HVAC HANGER AND SUPPORT SYSTEM
GENERAL
A. Pipe, ductwork, and equipment hangers, supports, anchors, saddles and shields.
B. Mechanical flashing.
C. Equipment curbs.
D. Mechanical sleeves and seals.
E. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
F. Sealants, firestop insulation, putty and compounds.
G. Pipe Stands
B. References.
C. Submittals.
21. PRODUCTS
21.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hydronic Piping:
1. Conform to International Mechanical Code, ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58,
MSS SP69 and MSS SP89 as applicable.
B. Steam and Steam Condensate Piping:
MSS SP69, MSS SP89, as applicable.
C. Refrigerant Piping

68
MSS SP69, MSS SP89, as applicable.
D. Hangers and Supports:
1. Hangers for Hot and Cold Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch, Carbon steel, adjustable
swivel, band type.
2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches; Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron
roll, double hanger.
5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger
rods.
6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels
with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
7. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.
8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and
wrought steel clamp.
10. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
11. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,
floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
12. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and
stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
14. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
15. Roof Support for Hot and Cold Pipe: See PIPE STANDS section below.
16. Hangers for insulated pipe shall be enlarged to compensate for insulation
thickness so that hangers support insulation. See Section 23 07 19.
17. See Section 23 05 48 for vibration isolation hangers and supports if applicable.
21.2 DUCTWORK HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and
Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
B. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
C. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel,
and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping
device.

69
E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Exposed Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
21.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: ASTM A36 steel or galvanized threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuous threaded.
1. Ductwork: Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
21.4 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to
forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
21.5 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.
B. Metal Counter flashing: 22 gage galvanized steel.
C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet buty; compatible with roofing.
D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
21.6 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base, mitered 3 inch cant,
variable step to match roof insulation, 1-1/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed
wood nailer. Minimum 18 inch height, unless specified otherwise.
21.7 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes through Fire Rated Floors and Walls: Schedule 40 steel pipe.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors and Walls: 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors and Walls: 18 gage galvanized steel.
D. Sleeves for Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
21.8 SEALANTS, FIRESTOP INSULATION, PUTTY, AND COMPOUNDS

70
A. Firestopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible, UL listed.
B. Firestop Putty: Non-harding, non-shrinking, UL listed.
C. Firestop Compounds: Cementitous material, non-shrinking, UL listed.
D. Sealants:
1. Non fire/smoke rated partitions: Acrylic or silicone based caulking.
2. Fire/smoke rated partitions: Silicone based caulking, UL listed.
21.9 MECHANICAL SEALS
A. Mechanical Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking EPDM
synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and
sleeve, connected with type 316 stainless steel bolts and reinforced plastic polymer
pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened,
providing a watertight and gas-tight seal and electrical insulation.
1. Provide high-temperature silicone links rated for 400 Deg. F for steam and
condensate applications.
2. A sleeve shall be provided for each mechanical seal.
a. Thermoplastic sleeves: Sleeve shall have smooth walls and shall be made
of molded non-metallic high density polyethylene (HDPE) with an integral
solid water stop, Advance Products & Systems Model PWS or equivalent.
b. Steel sleeves: Sleeve shall have smooth walls, shall be made of Schedule
40 steel with an integral welded solid water stop, and shall have corrosion-
resistant coating, Advance Products & Systems Model GWS or equivalent.
21.10 PIPE STANDS (ROOF)
A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop or field –fabricated assemblies made of
manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-
shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:
1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
2. Base: Plastic
3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,
continuous-thread rods.
4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel with plastic or
stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.
D. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

71
1. Description: Assembly of Bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
2. Bases: One or more; plastic
3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4. Horizontal member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5. Pipe Supports: galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
E. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from
structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on
permanent stationary roof curb.
22. EXECUTION
22.1 INSTALLATION
22.2 INSERTS
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4
inches.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide
through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush
with slab.
A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
B. Support fire protection systems piping independently from other piping systems. Fire
main piping may be trapezed with other piping systems. Coordinate trapeze hangers
with the Sprinkler Contractor.
1. Reference sections for additional information regarding fire protection and
plumbing piping supports and hangers.
C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

72
E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.
G. Support vertical piping at every floor and at intervals of no more than 12 ft. Support
vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.
H. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
I. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
J. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for non-insulated copper pipe.
K. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
L. Prime coat steel hangers and supports in the mechanical room and other exposed
areas. Refer to the Architectural reflected ceiling plans for location of exposed
ceilings. Hangers and supports located in attic space, crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and
suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
M. Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve specified
pipe slopes.
N. Saddles, Shields and Inserts
1. Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining
pipe insulation.
2. Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold piping that has vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees (360 degrees on trapeze hangers with U-
bolt clamps) and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following:
NPS LENGTH THICKNESS
1 through 3-1/2 12 0.048
4 12 0.060
5 & 6 18 0.060
8 through 14 24 0.075
16 through 24 24 0.105
3. Pipes 8 inches and larger shall have wood inserts.
4. Insert materials shall be at least as long as the protective shield.

73
Provide manufacturer-recommended saddles, inserts, and/or shields where
cellular foam insulation is used. The removal of sections of cellular foam
insulation for the purpose of pipe support is not acceptable.
22.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-
steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being
attached.
1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and
Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing;
install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of
each branch intersection.
D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct
with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a
maximum intervals of 16 feet.
F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-
out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
22.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those
permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to
B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS Standards D1.1.

74
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to
compensators.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal
pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends.
Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion
and contraction of piping.
22.6 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping and ductwork
penetrate weather or waterproofed walls and floors.
B. Seal floor, shower, mop sink, etc. drains watertight to adjacent materials.
C. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars
above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.
22.7 SLEEVES
A. Provide pipe and duct sleeves at all fire/smoke rated partitions, exterior wall
penetrations and wall penetrations into exposed areas. Pipe and duct sleeves are not
required for penetrations through non-rated concealed partitions.
B. Wall sleeves shall not be used to support pipes or ducts.
C. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Size so as to allow for continuous insulation wrapping through sleeve.
E. Sleeves through floors shall extend a minimum 2” above the finish floor level. Sleeves
through walls should be flush with wall surface.
F. Where piping or ductwork penetrate non-rated ceilings or walls, close off space
between pipe or duct and adjacent work with urethane rod stock and caulk air tight.
G. Seal pipe and duct penetrations through non-rated floors.
1. Where piping is not located in a rated shaft and it penetrates a single non-rated
floor, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with urethane rod stock
and caulk air tight.
2. Where piping is not located in a rated shaft and it penetrates multiple non-rated
floors, close off space between pipe and adjacent work with appropriate fire-
rated sealant, insulation, putty, or compound.

75
3. Where ductwork is not located in a rated shaft and it penetrates a single non-
rated floor, close off space between duct and adjacent work with appropriate
fire-rated sealant, insulation, putty, or compound.
4. Where ductwork is not located in a rated shaft and it penetrates multiple non-
rated floors, close off space between duct and adjacent work with appropriate
fire-rated sealant, insulation, putty, or compound. Install fire damper in duct at
each floor level. Ductwork containing fume exhaust air shall not be provided
with fire dampers.
H. Where piping or ductwork penetrate rated floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space
between pipe or duct with appropriate fire rated sealant, insulation, putty or
compound. Refer to the Drawings for fire/smoke rated wall locations and the
appropriate ratings.
I. Provide on ductwork close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers on the side of
penetration that are exposed to view.
J. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons on piping at finished surfaces.
K. Provide mechanical seals and sleeves through exterior wall and floor penetrations and
3 hour or higher fire rated partitions.
L. All ductwork through exterior walls to be installed with flashing and counter flashing.
22.8 HANGER SCHEDULES
Reference International Plumbing Code and International Mechanical Code
where applicable

77
GENERAL
A. Sight flow indicators.
B. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
C. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
D. Piping pressure and temperature test plugs.
E. Static pressure and filter gages.
B. References
C. Submittals
E. Project record documents
1. Accurately record actual locations of instrumentation.
F. Delivery, storage, and handling
A. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for required
rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.
23. PRODUCTS
23.1 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS
A. Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and paddle wheel indicator, threaded
or flanged ends.
B. Minimum pressure rating: 150 psig.
C. Minimum temperature rating: 200 deg F.
D. End connections for NPS 2 inch and smaller: Threaded.

78
E. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 inch and larger: Flanged.
23.2 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Standard: ASME B40.200.
B. Type: General use, ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon-tube type,
bottom connection, liquid-filled.
C. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2-inches diameter.
D. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch .
E. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
F. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
G. Range: Conform to the following:
1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg to 15 psi.
2. All fluids: 2 times operating pressure.
23.3 PRESSURE GAGE ACCESSORIES
A. Syphon: 1/4-inch NPS straight coil constructed of brass tubing with threads on each
end.
B. Snubber: 1/4-inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous metal disc. Disc
material shall be suitable for fluid served and rated pressure.
23.4 GLASS THERMOMETERS
B. Case: Die cast, aluminum finished, in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,
9 inches long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane,
360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red reading, magnifying lens, with non-mercury fluid.
E. Scale: Satin-faced, non reflective aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum or brass, for separable socket, length to suit
installation.

79
G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
H. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:
1. Condenser/Heat Pump Water: 0 to 160 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions
(minus 18 to 70 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions).
2. Heating Water: 30 to 250 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 150 deg C with
1-degree scale divisions).
3. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 20 to 50 deg C
with 1-degree scale divisions).
4. Steam and Condensate: 50 to 400 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 200
deg C with 1-degree scale divisions).
23.5 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system
design pressure; with 2-inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with
chain permanently fastened to well and cap.
23.6 PIPING PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS fitting and 2 self-sealing
valve-type core inserts, suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from a
dial-type thermometer or pressure gage. Test plug shall have gasketed and threaded
cap with retention chain and body of length to extend beyond insulation. Pressure
rating shall be 500 psig.
B. Core Material: Conform to the following for fluid and temperature range:
1. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas, 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to 93 deg C): Neoprene.
23.7 STATIC PRESSURE GAGES
A. Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black figures, front
recalibration adjustment, 3 percent of full scale accuracy.
B. Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead mounting, 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter tubing.
C. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and [ball, flapper, or
paddle wheel] <Insert device> indicator, and threaded or flanged ends.
D. Minimum Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)] [150 psig (1034 kPa)] <Insert value>.

80
E. Minimum Temperature Rating: [200 deg F (93 deg C)] <Insert temperature>.
F. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.
G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
24. EXECUTION
24.1 GENERAL
24.2 FLOW MEASURING METERS
A. Install where shown on plans and schematics as indicated.
B. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring
elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
detailed on drawings.
C. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems. Maintain
manufacturer-recommended minimum upstream and downstream distances.
D. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
E. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.
F. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support
meters.
G. Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable
position.
H. Calibrate meter after installation in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
I. Installation of steam meter and associated wiring, pressure transmitter and RTD
assembly, shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and
recommendations, applicable requirements, and as detailed on drawings.
J. Pressure and temperature taps shall be installed a minimum of three pipe diameters
downstream, before any isolation valves.
K. Steam will not be turned on by client personnel until the steam meter is fully installed
and operating satisfactorily and the downstream steam piping is successfully leak
tested and secure.

81
L. Only client personnel will be authorized to turn steam service on or off.
24.3 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve, located on pipe at most
readable position.
B. Install as shown on plans, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Pressure Gage Ball Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon in lieu of
snubber for steam pressure gages.
24.4 THERMOMETERS
A. Install thermometers in vertical and tilted positions to allow reading by observer
standing on floor.
B. Install as shown on plans and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated, in
vertical position. Fill well with oil or graphite and secure cap.
24.5 TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plugs: Install where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure
cap.
24.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces.
Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint

83
25. GENERAL
A. Sight flow indicators.
B. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
C. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
D. Piping pressure and temperature test plugs.
E. Static pressure and filter gages.
B. References
C. Submittals
26. PRODUCTS
26.1 SIGHT FLOW INDICATORS
A. Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and paddle wheel indicator, threaded
or flanged ends.
B. Minimum pressure rating: 150 psig.
C. Minimum temperature rating: 200 deg F.
D. End connections for NPS 2 inch and smaller: Threaded.
E. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 inch and larger: Flanged.

84
26.2 PRESSURE GAGES
B. Type: General use, ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon-tube type,
C. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2-inches diameter.
D. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch NPS.
E. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
F. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
G. Range: Conform to the following:
26.3 PRESSURE GAGE ACCESSORIES
end.
26.4 GLASS THERMOMETERS
B. Case: Die cast, aluminum finished, in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured,
9 inches long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plane,
360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube: Red reading, magnifying lens, with non-mercury fluid.
E. Scale: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum or brass, for separable socket, length to suit
installation.
G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to
maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

85
H. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:
1. Condenser/Heat Pump Water: 0 to 160 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions
(minus 18 to 70 deg C with 1-degree scale divisions).
2. Heating Water: 30 to 250 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 150 deg C with
1-degree scale divisions).
3. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 20 to 50 deg C
with 1-degree scale divisions).
4. Steam and Condensate: 50 to 400 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 200
deg C with 1-degree scale divisions).
26.5 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system
design pressure; with 2-inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with
chain permanently fastened to well and cap.
B.
A. Test Plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS fitting and 2 self-sealing
valve-type core inserts, suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from a
dial-type thermometer or pressure gage. Test plug shall have gasketed and threaded
cap with retention chain and body of length to extend beyond insulation. Pressure
rating shall be 500 psig.
1. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas, 20 to 200 deg F (minus 7 to 93 deg C): Neoprene.
26.7 STATIC PRESSURE GAGES
A. Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black figures, front
recalibration adjustment, 3 percent of full scale accuracy.
B. Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead mounting, 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter tubing.
C. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with sight glass and [ball, flapper, or
paddle wheel] <Insert device> indicator, and threaded or flanged ends.
D. Minimum Pressure Rating: [125 psig (860 kPa)] [150 psig (1034 kPa)] <Insert value>.
E. Minimum Temperature Rating: [200 deg F (93 deg C)] <Insert temperature>.
F. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.

86
G. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged.
27. EXECUTION
27.1 GENERAL
27.2 FLOW MEASURING METERS
A. Install where shown on plans and schematics as indicated.
B. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring
elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
detailed on drawings.
C. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems. Maintain
manufacturer-recommended minimum upstream and downstream distances.
D. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.
E. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.
F. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support
meters.
G. Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable
position.
H. Calibrate meter after installation in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
I. Installation of steam meter and associated wiring, pressure transmitter and RTD
assembly, shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and
recommendations, applicable requirements, and as detailed on drawings.
J. Pressure and temperature taps shall be installed a minimum of three pipe diameters
downstream, before any isolation valves.
K. Steam will not be turned on by client personnel until the steam meter is fully installed
and operating satisfactorily and the downstream steam piping is successfully leak
tested and secure.
L. Only client personnel will be authorized to turn steam service on or off.
27.3 PRESSURE GAGES

87
A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve, located on pipe at most
readable position.
C. Pressure Gage Ball Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon in lieu of
27.4 THERMOMETERS
A. Install thermometers in vertical and tilted positions to allow reading by observer
standing on floor.
B. Install as shown on plans and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated, in
vertical position. Fill well with oil or graphite and secure cap.
27.5 TEST PLUGS
cap.
A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace
cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.

88
HVAC DUCT FABRICATION WORK
28. GENERAL
A. Metal ductwork.
B. Sheet metal plenums.
C. Kitchen hood ductwork.
D. Duct cleaning.
A. References.
1. See Section for information related to kitchen grease ducts and generator engine
exhaust.
B. Performance requirements.
1. No variation of duct configuration or sizes shall be permitted except by written
permission.
C. Submittals.
1. Submit detailed CAD-generated ductwork drawings at minimum ¼” scale, with
details of the following:
a. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations,
sections, components, and attachments to other work.
b. Duct layout indicating pressure classification and sizes on plans.
c. Seam and joint construction.
d. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
e. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment,
vibration isolation, and duct attachment.
NOTE: No installation of ductwork shall be allowed until detailed shop drawings
have been reviewed by the Engineer. Any ductwork that is installed prior to the
Engineer’s review of the shop drawings shall be subject to removal and
replacement at the Contractor’s expense.
D. Project record documents.
1. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting
location and type. Show additional fittings used.
E. Quality assurance.
1. Perform Work in accordance with the following standards:

89
a. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
b. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
c. NFPA 91 - Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and
Vapor Removal or Conveying.
d. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and
Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.
e. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
f. SMACNA – HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
g. SMACNA - Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards
h. International Mechanical Code, current edition.
F. Qualifications.
1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum five years documented experience.
2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five year’s experience.
G. Regulatory requirements.
1. Construct all ductwork per codes listed in smacna
28.3 Environmental requirements.
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by
sealant manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.
29. PRODUCTS
29.1 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653 galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having
G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90. Provide mill-phosphatized finish
for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316 sheet form with No. 4 finish for
surfaces of ducts exposed to view, and Type 304 sheet form with No. 1 finish for
concealed ducts.
C. Steel Ducts: ASTM A366.
D. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors
and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061- T6 or of equivalent strength.
E. Insulated Flexible Ducts:

90
1. UL 181, Class 1, mechanically-locked spun nylon fabric supported by helically
wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; fire retardant polyethylene vapor
barrier film.
2. Pressure Rating: 6 inches WG positive, 5.0 inches WG negative (through 16”
diameter), 1.0’ WG negative (18” to 20”).
3. Maximum Velocity: 5500 fpm.
4. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 250 degrees F.
5. Minimum Sound Attenuation Performance (Insertion Loss in dB of 12’ Length of
12” Round Duct):
a. 63 Hz Octave Band: 13
b. 125 Hz Octave Band: 37
c. 250 Hz Octave Band: 31
d. 500 Hz Octave Band: 34
e. 1 kHz Octave Band: 37
f. 2 kHz Octave Band: 47
g. 4 kHz Octave Band: 34
6. Manufacturer: Flexmaster Type 6B or equivalent.
F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
G. Joint & Seam Sealant: Shall be a flexible, water-based, adhesive sealant designed for
use in all pressure duct systems. After curing, it shall be resistant to ultraviolet light
and shall prevent the entry of water, air, and moisture into the duct system. Sealer
shall be UL 723 listed and meet NFPA requirements for Class 1 ductwork. VOC shall be
<75 g/l.
1. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
2. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
3. Mold and mildew resistant.
4. Service: Indoor or outdoor.
5. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
6. Manufacturer: Ductmate Industries PROseal or equivalent.
H. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel or galvanized, threaded.
29.2 SHOP FABRICATED DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate, reinforce and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible, latest edition, and as indicated. Provide duct material,
gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B. Construct T's, and elbows in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards-Metal and Flexible, latest edition, using radius of not less than 1-1/2 times
width of duct on centerline. Where mitered rectangular elbows are used or indicated,
provide dual wall airfoil turning vanes.

91
C. Reference SMACNA figure 2-9 to construct gradual transitions where ductwork
changes size or offsets.
29.3 MANUFACTURER FABRICATED DUCTWORK
A. Fabricate, reinforce and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible, latest edition, and as indicated. Provide duct material,
gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B. Round and oval duct shall be spiral lockseam duct with light reinforcing corrugations
unless indicated otherwise.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum bend radius elbows shall be 1.5 times
the duct diameter (major or minor axis on oval ductwork depending on direction of
bend). Where not possible and where mitered elbows are used or indicated, provide
double wall airfoil turning vanes.
D. Fabricate round and oval duct; fittings in accordance with SMACNA Standards. Joints
shall be minimum 2 inch insertion length for joint connections.
E. Weld ductwork is to be weld with filler rod of the same material as the metal that is
being welded. Coat welded joints with protective paint to prevent damage to
galvanized surfaces.
F. On round and oval ducts, provide 45 deg wye tee take-offs or 90 deg conical tee take-
offs or 45 degree low loss entry tee take-offs or other fitting as indicated on plans.
Straight taps are not acceptable.
29.4 TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM – RECTANGULAR DUCT
A. Slide on flange system: Ductmate and Ductmate WDCI connection system complete
with interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats,
and corner clips. Gasket material shall be chemical resistant material in all fume
exhaust ductwork.
B. Formed on flange system: TDC, TDF or equivalent connection system or equivalent.
Such flanges shall be constructed as SMACNA T-24 flange (Page 1-25 and 1-37 ’85
SMACNA Duct Construction Manual, 1985 Edition).
29.5 TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM – ROUND AND OVAL DUCT
A. Slip type connector: .

92
B. Slide on flange system. Spiralmate and Ovalmate connection system complete with
interlocking angle and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and
corner clips.
C. Formed on flange system: Factory-applied Van Stone connection on one end of the
duct with field-applied Van Stone connecter on the other end of the duct. Provide
factory-applied Van Stone connections on each end of fittings.
29.6 LOUVER BACKPAN
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible and NFPA 96.
B. Construct of 18-gage galvanized steel using continuous external welded joints.
C. Welded ductwork is to be welded with filler rod of the same material as the metal that
is being welded. Prime coat and paint welded joints with cold galvanized paint.
D. Slope bottom to prevent accumulation of water. Provide drains as necessary.
29.7 DOUBLE WALL, PRE-MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL PLENUMS (OUTSIDE AIR PLENUM,
RELIEF AIR PLENUM)
A. General: Double wall, insulated pressurized plenum equipment shall be provided as
indicated on the drawings. All panels and components shall be prefabricated and
supplied by a nationally recognized manufacturer with published standards of
construction, assembly and technical performance. Provide plenum as manufactured
by factory..
B. The entire plenum installation shall be designed by the plenum manufacturer to be
self-supporting. Where roof spaces or loading require additional strength, it shall be
provided by heavier panel skins, additional structural members and necessary pipe
columns. The installer shall furnish and install all such additional structural members
according to the drawings and details furnished by the plenum manufacturer.
C. The finished plenum shall be able to withstand a positive internal static pressure of 4"
and a negative internal static pressure of -4". Under these static conditions, the
assembled structure shall not exhibit any panel joint deflections in excess of L/200
where L is the unsupported span length of any panel section within the completed
plenum.
D. Joint Construction: Snap-lock type with continuous self-locking joint on both inside and
outside of panel surface.
E. All panels shall be 4" thick with solid galvanized exterior shell and a solid galvanized
interior shell as noted on the drawings and mechanical equipment schedule.

93
F. Outer shall be constructed of minimum 18-ga. galvanized sheet metal. Inner shell shall
be constructed of minimum 22-ga. galvanized solid sheet metal.
G. Assembly Trim: Minimum 18-ga. hot-dipped galvanized steel furnished in standard
lengths to be field cut.
H. All perimeter and longitudinal steel channel shall be constructed of ASTM Type A-446
structural quality galvanized steel with a minimum of 18 gage thickness or ASTM Type
A-526 galvanized steel with a minimum of 16 gage thickness.
I. Each panel assembly shall be completely filled acoustical/thermal insulating material
that is inert, mildew and mold resistant as well as vermin proof. Insulation shall have a
flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50.
J. Thermal Performance: Insulating materials shall have a maximum thermal
conductance of 0.06 Btu / Hr per square foot per Deg F (@ 75 Deg F mean
temperature).
K. Personnel Access Doors: Provide personnel access doors where shown on the plans.
Door sizes shall be 36”W x 66”H. All access door panels and doors shall be
constructed of 18-ga. solid galvanized steel inner liner and galvanized outer shell. Each
door shall have a minimum of two ball bearing hinges and two wedge-lever door
handles. All levers shall be operable from inside or outside the casing. Door swings
shall be as indicated on the plans. Doors shall seat against neoprene gasket material,
installed around entire perimeter of door. Provide 12" square viewing windows which
are composed of double-glazed layers of wire reinforced safety glass separated by an
air space and sealed with rubber seals.
L. Plenum construction shall be fully coordinated with other trades to accommodate
walls, floor, structure, piping, and other components in the vicinity. All penetrations
and joints shall be sealed airtight.
30. EXECUTION
30.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, current edition and International
Mechanical Code requirements.
B. All ductwork shall be stored, installed, and maintained per the “Intermediate Level” as
defined by SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines, current edition.
Acceptable cleanliness shall be verified by concerned personnel prior to air distribution
system operation.

94
C. Seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, current edition.
D. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
E. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification
indicated.
F. Install round in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.
G. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
H. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.
I. Install only low loss high efficiency fittings at takeoffs. Extractors not allowed.
J. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
K. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
L. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
M. Install ducts with a clearance of 2 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
N. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, unless specifically indicated.
O. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
P. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer
vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
Q. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions
and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction
opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness
as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
R. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant.
Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Mechanical division Section "Duct
Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in
Division 07 Section "Firestopping."

95
S. Verify location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to
conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Refer to
reflected ceiling plans, finish schedule, material finish specification, and shop
drawings.
T. Coordinate routing with all other trades to establish space requirements for each.
U. Contractor may vary route and shape of ductwork and make offsets during progress of
work if required to meet structural or other interferences. Where such changes impair
the system performance, the changes will be corrected at Contractor’s expense.
V. All ductwork shall be substantially and neatly supported on galvanized steel straps or
angles riveted or bolted to duct flanges and properly anchored to the construction so
that horizontal ducts are without sag or sway, vertical ducts are without buckle, and all
ducts are free from the possibility of deformation, collapse or vibration.
W. Openings required for ductwork through structural elements in new construction shall
be coordinated with the General Contractor. Shop drawings locating such openings
shall be prepared in ample time to meet the construction schedule.
X. Provide sleeves at all duct penetrations through walls, floors and roofs. Openings
through sound-rated partitions shall have annular space stuffed with fiberglass
insulation for full thickness of wall.
Y. Provide 2-inch deep bitumastic coated drip pans on all non-ducted hoods, fans or
penthouses used for relief or exhaust air service. Pans shall be 12 inches larger all
around than roof opening with clear vertical openings between pan and structure as
indicated. Insulate pan where indicated.
Z. Install automatic control dampers as recommended by the manufacturer.
AA. Prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, neoprene gaskets, or
other approved safing material.
BB. Provide openings in ductwork to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal cap with
spring device or screw to prevent air leakage.
CC. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
DD. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on
open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. Keep
openings covered until ready for continuing duct run or final connections.
EE. Paint ductwork visible behind wall-mounted air outlets and inlets matte black.

96
FF. Change duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 30 degrees divergence and 20 degrees
convergence. Blunt transitions are not acceptable.
GG. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches and smaller
and install with crimp in direction of air flow.
HH. Provide closure flanges around exposed ductwork at wall and ceiling penetrations, 1-
1/4 inches wide minimum.
II. Provide flexible connect between ductwork and all moving equipment.
1. Provide 1-inch slack for free movement.
JJ. Join VAV boxes to medium pressure supply duct mains with minimum straight length
of duct equal to 5 times box inlet diameter size. Duct to be rigid and the same size as
VAV box inlet. Flexible ductwork is not allowed to join boxes to supply duct main.
KK. Protect duct interiors from the elements and foreign materials until building is
enclosed. Follow SMACNA’s “Duct Cleanliness for New Construction”.
LL. Threaded cap test holes shall be provided in all ductwork. Test holes shall be installed
after the reheat coil in all VAV boxes. Provide extensions to allow for insulation
thickness. Test holes l.
30.2 GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, current edition and International
Mechanical Code requirements.
B. Seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, current edition.
C. Duct sizes are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.
D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and
controllers.
E. Do not allow round duct to be fitted to oval by deformation alone. A round-to-oval
transition must be used.
F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
G. Cover all exposed fiberglass insulation with duct tape.

97
H. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or tape polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
I. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with stainless steel bands with worm gear
tightener, nylon bands are unacceptable.
J. Duct transition from round to rectangular and vise versa shall be made with
rectangular to round duct transition fitting.
K. Provide flange-type joint at transverse joints or seal as specified. All transverse joints
shall be inspected by the Owner prior to insulating ductwork.
L. Duct work upstream of air terminal units shall be rigid duct with minimum five
diameters of straight ductwork upstream of air terminal unit inlet or 18” whichever is
greater. Straight duct shall be the same inside diameter as air terminal unit inlet. No
reducers, flex duct or change of direction allowed within this distance.
M. Air terminal take-offs from rectangular main ducts shall be lo-loss 45°F take-offs,
extractors are not allowed.
N. Diffusers and register take-offs from rectangular duct mains shall be lo-loss 45° fittings,
with integral balancing damper that is provided with stand-off bracket and quadrant
lock. Extractors are not allowed.
O. A maximum length of 3’ of flexible duct is allowed upstream of each diffuser or grille.
See details on Drawings.
P. Exhaust grille/register branch duct connections to rectangular mains shall be lo-loss
45° entry fittings with integral balancing damper.
Q. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static
pressure holds door in closed position.
R. Plenum construction shall be fully coordinated with other trades to accommodate
walls, floor, structure, piping, and other components in the vicinity. All penetrations
and joints shall be sealed airtight.
30.3 INSTALLATION OF 2" AND GREATER PRESSURE CLASS DUCTWORK (POSITIVE OR
NEGATIVE PRESSURE)
A. All round and oval duct elbows installed shall be die-formed, gored, pleated or
mitered. All mitered elbows shall be equipped with turning vanes.
B. On round and oval ducts, provide 45 deg wye or 90 deg conical tee take-offs as
indicated on plans. Straight taps are not acceptable.

98
C. All diverging flow fittings shall be constructed such that no excess material projects
from the body into the branch tap entrance.
D. Transverse joints of all rectangular ducts greater than 24" wide or deep shall be
fabricated with flanging system as called out previously (Ductmate or equivalent).
30.4 INSTALLATION OF 1" AND LESS PRESSURE CLASS DUCTWORK (POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE
PRESSURE)
A. All round duct elbows installed shall be of the adjustable, die-formed, gored, pleated
or mitered type. All adjustable elbows shall be sealed after installation.
B. All mitered elbows shall be equipped with turning vanes.
C. Connect ceiling diffusers to low pressure ducts with adjustable elbow at duct and short
length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp. Do not use flexible duct to
change direction. Connection detail as well as maximum length of flex duct allowed to
diffusers is indicated on the plans.
30.5 PLENUMS
A. General
1. Unless otherwise noted, mount casings on 4-inch high concrete curbs.
30.6 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do
not use two-part tape sealing system.
C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.
When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the
exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of
fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
F. Exposed ductwork serving ventilated workstations and corrosive storage cabinets:
1. Install the exposed stainless steel ductwork serving the ventilated workstations
with the longitudinal weld facing the adjacent wall and away from public view. If
possible, install one continuous exposed duct without transverse joints. Install
escutcheon ring at ceiling penetration. Ring shall be same material and same

99
finish as exposed duct. Note that exposed ductwork shall be provided with a No.
4 finish. Verify acceptable appearance of installed ductwork with Architect after
installation.
30.7 CLEANING
A. The air handling units, energy recovery wheel, exhaust fans, and other HVAC airside
equipment shall not be used for temporary building conditioning without the written
permission from the Owner and Architect/Engineer. Open ductwork that has been
installed shall be protected during the duration of the project with polyethylene plastic
and duct tape over the open ends. Uninstalled ductwork shall be protected from
construction dust by covering the uninstalled ductwork with polyethylene plastic.
Prior to installing ductwork, the inside of the ductwork shall be wiped down or
vacuumed.
B. Clean inside all air handling units, energy recovery units, and outside air duct systems
before the fans are turned on. Call for inspection by the owner’s representative to
verify that all ducts are cleaned. If the ductwork is unacceptable, the contractor shall
provide vacuuming of these duct systems by forcing air at high velocity through duct
where manual cleaning in not possible due to duct lengths or size. Call for re-
inspection by Owner's representative.
C. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or
bypass during cleaning.
D. Call for inspection by Owner's representative.
E. Install a fresh set of filters in all equipment immediately prior to project turnover.
30.8 DUCTWORK SCHEDULE
[Note to A/E: Check and revise pressure class column in Ductwork Schedule based on
project specific requirements]
Duct System:
Materi
al:
Longitudin
al Joints:
Transvers
e Joints:
Pressur
e Class:
Sealan
t
Class:
Leakage
Class:
Additiona
l Notes:
Outside air
system upstream
of AHU
Galv.
Steel
3A 4A, 4C -2” B 24
Rectangular SA Galv. 3A, 3E 4A, 4C, 4D +4” A 6 8B

100
Duct System:
Materi
al:
Longitudin
al Joints:
Transvers
e Joints:
Pressur
e Class:
Sealan
t
Class:
Leakage
Class:
Additiona
l Notes:
system upstream
of terminal units
Steel
Round SA system
upstream of
terminal units
Galv.
Steel
3C, 3E 4B, 4D +4” A 3 8B
Rectangular SA
system
downstream of
terminal units
Galv.
Steel
3A, 3B, 3E 4A, 4C, 4D +2” A 24 8B
Round SA system
downstream of
terminal units
Galv.
Steel
3C, 3E 4B, 4D +2” A 12 8B
Rectangular
general EA or RA
system upstream
of terminal unit
Galv.
Steel
3A, 3B, 3E 4A, 4C, 4D -2” A 24 8B
Round general EA
or RA system
upstream of
terminal unit
Galv.
Steel
3C, 3E 4B, 4D -2” A 12 8B
Rectangular
general EA or RA
system
downstream of
terminal unit
Galv.
Steel
3A, 3E 4A, 4C, 4D -4” A 6 8B
Round general EA
or RA system
downstream of
terminal unit
Galv.
Steel
3C, 3E 4B, 4D -4” A 3 8B
Rectangular fume
EA system
upstream of
terminal unit
Stainles
s Steel
3A, 3B, 3E 4A, 4C, 4D -2” A 6 8B
Round concealed
fume EA system
upstream of
terminal unit
Stainles
s Steel
3C, 3E 4B, 4D -2” A 3 8B
Round exposed
fume EA system
Stainles
s Steel
3E 4D -2” A 3 8B

101
Duct System:
Materi
al:
Longitudin
al Joints:
Transvers
e Joints:
Pressur
e Class:
Sealan
t
Class:
Leakage
Class:
Additiona
l Notes:
upstream of
terminal unit
Rectangular fume
EA system
downstream of
terminal unit
Stainles
s Steel
3A, 3E 4A, 4C, 4D -4” A 6 8B
Round fume EA
system
downstream of
terminal unit
Stainles
s Steel
3C, 3E 4B, 4D -4” A 3 8B
DUCTWORK SCHEDULE NOTES:
Longitudinal Joint Options:
3A: Pittsburgh lock. Refer to Figure 1-5, SMACNA.
3B: Button punch snap lock. Refer to Figure 1-5, SMACNA.
3C: Spiral lockseam.
3D: Snaplock.
3E: Welded.
3F: Double-wall, pre-manufactured sheet metal plenum.
Transverse Joint Options:
4A: Pre-manufactured flanged duct connection system specified under “Products” section of
this specification.
4B 0-24” Major Axis Diameter: Interior slip coupling beaded at center, fastened to duct
with sealing compound applied continuously around joint before assembling and after
fastening.
26” Major Axis Diameter and Up: Pre-manufactured flanged duct connection system
specified under “Products” section of this specification.
4C: Any standard transverse joint as shown in Figure 1-4 of SMACNA is acceptable.
4D: Welded
Sealant Class Options:
6: Seal class is defined by the following table (refer to Table 4-1, SMACNA HVAC Air Duct
Leakage Test Manual):
Seal Class: Sealing Required:
A
All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and ductwork penetrations.
Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as a primary sealant on metal

102
ducts.
B
All transverse and longitudinal seams. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be
used as a primary sealant on metal ducts.
C Transverse joints only.
Leakage:
7: Leakage Class is defined by Figure 4-1, SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
Additional Comments:
8A: See Drawings for further information regarding extent of stainless steel ductwork.
8B: Field welded ductwork is to be welded with filler rod of the same material as the metal
that is being welded. Field coat welded joints with protective paint to prevent damage
to galvanized surfaces.
30.9 PRESSURE TESTING
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections according to SMACNA’s “HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual” and prepare test reports:
1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate
leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
2. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or
section being tested. If pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at
maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum
design operating pressure. Give seven days’ advance notice for testing.
3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Refer to paragraph 3.6.
4. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is equal to or less than maximum
allowable.
5. Test no less than 25% of the supply air ductwork upstream of terminal units, 25%
of the return air ductwork downstream of terminal units, 25% of the exhaust air
ductwork downstream of terminal units, and 50% of the fume exhaust ductwork
downstream of terminal units.
30.10 CLEANING NEW SYSTEMS
A. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and
perform cleaning before air balancing.
30.11 Use service openings, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for
inspection.

103
HVAC DUCT WORK INSULATION
31. GENERAL
A. Ductwork insulation.
B. Duct liner.
C. Insulation jackets.
A. References.
B. Submittals.
C. Delivery, Storage, and Handling.
D. Quality assurance.
1. Materials: ASTM E84 Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 or less.
E. Qualifications.
1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years’ experience.
F. Environmental requirements.
2. Maintain temperature during and after installation as recommended by the
manufacturer.
32. PRODUCTS
A. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.
1. 'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.30 at 75 degrees F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: less than 3 percent by volume.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm maximum.

104
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Vapor Barrier Tape
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
D. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage (1.5 mm).
A. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
4. Density (concealed locations): 3.0 lb/cu ft.
5. Density (exposed locations): 6.0 lb/cu ft.
C. Vapor Barrier Tape
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
32.3 CELLULAR FOAM
A. Insulation: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric,
sheet.
1. 'K' ('ksi') Value ASTM C177 or C518; 0.27 at 75 degrees
F.
4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: ASTM D209; 0.2 percent by
volume.
5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.08 perm-
inches.
8. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier
adhesive.

105
32.4 DUCT LINER
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Armacell AP CoilFlex
2. Nomaco Fiber-free
Flexible Polyimide Foam Duct Liner: Preformed, polyimide foam coated with acrylic
polymer, sheet materials complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
Indoor Air Quality Characteristics: Fiber-free and formaldehyde-free.
Odor Characteristics: No objectionable odors when tested using ASTM
C1304
Mold Growth Characteristics: Meets requirements of UL181
Fungi Resistance Characteristics: Meets requirements of ASTM G21
Bacterial Resistance Characteristics: Meets requirements of ASTM G22
Antibacterial Coating: EPA-registered for use in air duct insulation
Erosion Resistance Characteristics: Does not break away, flake off, or show
evidence of delamination at velocities of 5,000 ft/min, tested at ASTM C1071
'K' value: ASTM C518, 0.30 at 75 degrees F.
Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.
Maximum moisture absorption: less than 2.0 percent by volume.
Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84; 25.
Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50.
Density: 0.8 lb/cu ft.
Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and
complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sound Absorption at 1” thickness: ASTM C423 and ASTM E795

106
a. 125 Hz: 0.11
b. 250 Hz: 0.30
c. 500 Hz: 0.73
d. 1 kHz: 1.02
e. 2 kHz: 0.73
f. 4 kHz: 0.66
g. NRC: 0.70
B. Cellular Foam Duct Liner: ASTM C534; flexible, cellular elastomeric, sheet.
1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.28 at 75 degrees F.
volume.
5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.08 perm-inches.
8. Connection Waterproof vapor barrier
adhesive.
9. AP Armaflex FS Self-Adhering Sheet Insulation or equivalent.
32.5 EXTERIOR DUCT INSULATION
A. Laminated Cellular Foam; closed cell foam insulation with metal covering.
1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: ASTM C177 or C518; 0.25 at 75 degrees F.
volume.
5. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.05 perm-
inches.
6. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier
adhesive.
7. Armaflex Armatuff Sheet Insulation or equivalent.
B. Polyisocyanurate Foam Sheathing: ASTM C1289; Foil-faced uniform closed-cell board.
Johns Manville AP Foil-Faced or equivalent.
1. ‘R’ Value: 9.0 at 1-1/2” board
thickness.
4. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.03 perm-inches.
6. Field applied jacketing: MFM FlexClad 400 or equivalent; 40 mil thickness.

107
a. Aluminum jacket with high-density cross-linked polymer film.
b. Aggressive Asphalt adhesive.
33. EXECUTION
33.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
33.2 INSTALLATION
B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
C. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
D. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
E. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor
barrier adhesive or tape to match jacket.
F. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.
G. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners
where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert
spacers.
H. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.
I. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow
operation without disturbing wrapping.
J. Do not overtighten and/or compress flexible glass fiber duct insulation.
K. At duct access doors or other openings, insulation shall be properly framed and
finished.
L. Duct Liner Application:
1. Install in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard and all
manufacturer recommendations.
2. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
3. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners if recommended by

108
manufacturer. Refer to SMACNA Standards for spacing.
4. Seal and smooth joints.
5. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
6. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow.
Increase duct size to allow for insulation thickness.
M. Exterior Insulation Application:
1. Laminated closed cell foam:
a. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
b. Utilize product compliant adhesives or pre-applied pressure sensitive
adhesives.
c. Cover seams with product compliant seal tape.
2. Polyisocyanurate:
a. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
b. Use product compliant adhesive for board installation
c. Taper insulation on top of ductwork to allow positive drainage.
d. Field-apply jacketing using pressure-sensitive adhesive and hand roller.
e. Install jacketing continuous across bottom of ductwork extending
minimum 6” up each side of duct. Pin duct bottoms over 36” in width.

109
33.3 GLASS FIBER DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
[Note to A/E: Edit Duct Insulation Schedule as necessary to suit project requirements]
Ductwork Application: Type: Thickness:
Vapor Barrier
Required (Y/N):
Exposed rectangular outside air duct in
mechanical rooms and chases
Rigid 2” Y
Exposed rectangular supply air duct in
mechanical rooms and chases
Rigid 2” Y
Exposed round supply air duct in mechanical
rooms
Flexible 2” Y
Exposed rectangular and round return air
duct in mechanical rooms
None required unless shown on plans
Exposed rectangular and round exhaust air
duct upstream of heat recovery system in
mechanical rooms
Exposed rectangular and round exhaust/relief
air duct downstream of heat recovery system
in mechanical rooms
Rigid 2” Y
Exposed rectangular and round return air
duct or exhaust air duct in other areas
Exposed rectangular and round supply air
duct upstream of terminal units
Flexible 2” Y
Exposed rectangular supply air duct
downstream of terminal units
Flexible 2” Y
Exposed round supply air duct downstream of
terminal units
Flexible 2” Y
Concealed rectangular and round supply air
duct upstream of terminal units
Flexible 2” Y
Concealed rectangular supply air duct
downstream of terminal units
Flexible 2” Y
Concealed round supply air duct downstream
of terminal units
Flexible 2” Y
Concealed return air duct upstream of
terminal units
Liner 1” Y
Concealed exhaust air duct None required unless shown on plans
Return air grille boots/transfer ducts (where
indicated on drawings)
Liner 1” N
Exterior Ductwork Exterior 2” Y

110
Schedule Notes:
All ductwork in mechanical rooms shall be insulated as though it were “Exposed”.
Any exterior ductwork requiring insulation from the categories above shall be
insulated as “Exterior

111
SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCTWORK INSULATION
1. GENERAL
B. Duct liner.
A. References.
B. Submittals.
C. LEED Submittals:
[Note to A/E: Edit to suit any LEED certification requirements]
D. Delivery, Storage, and Handling.
F. Qualifications.
1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years’ experience.
G. Environmental requirements.
1. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
2. Maintain temperature during and after installation as recommended by the manufacturer.
2. PRODUCTS

112
SECTION 23 07 13 - DUCTWORK INSULATION
1. GENERAL
B. Duct liner.
A. References.
B. Submittals.
C. LEED Submittals:
[Note to A/E: Edit to suit any LEED certification requirements]
D. Delivery, Storage, and Handling.
F. Qualifications.
1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years’ experience.
G. Environmental requirements.
1. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
2. Maintain temperature during and after installation as recommended by the manufacturer.
2. PRODUCTS

113
HVAC DUCT WORK ACCESSERIES
GENERAL
A. Air turning devices.
B. Duct access doors.
C. Duct test holes.
D. Flexible duct connections.
E. Fire dampers.
F. Smoke dampers.
G. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
H. Volume control dampers.
I. Gravity backdraft dampers.
J. Duct silencers
K. Remote damper operators
L. Control dampers
33.5 REFEREENCE SECTION FOR THE FOLLOWING:
A. References.
B. Submittals.
C. Project record documents.
1. Record actual locations of access doors, test holes etc.
D. Qualifications.
1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum five years documented experience.
E. Regulatory requirements.
1. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: UL Listed and classified.

114
1. See Section Concerned
2. Extra materials.
3. Provide two of each size and type of fusible link for fire and combination
fire/smoke dampers.
34. PRODUCTS
34.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES
A. Note that air extractors or "scoops" shall not be used under any circumstances.
B. Fabricated turning vanes: Provide turning vanes and vane runners constructed in
accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Construction Standards", current edition.
C. Manufactured turning vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved
blades set at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips
suitable for mounting in ductwork.
34.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick
fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick
insulation with sheet metal cover.
1. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with sash locks.
2. Up to 18 Inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks.
3. Up to 24 x 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside
and inside handles.
4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.
B. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
34.3 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches,
neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.
B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw ca,
approved equivalent. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
34.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible.

115
B. Construct flexible connector of neoprene coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct
flanges for attachment to duct and equipment.
34.5 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.
B. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125
inch ceramic fiber on top side, and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with
locking clip.
C. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless
steel closure springs and latches. Configure with blades out of air stream.
D. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for
combination fire/balancing dampers.
34.6 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 5555, and as indicated.
B. Dampers: UL Class 1 multiple blade type damper, airfoil blades automatically
operated by electric actuator. Actuator shall be approved .
C. Manufacturer shall provide auxiliary contact for monitoring of damper position by fire
alarm system.
34.7 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated.
B. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.
C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
1. Rectangular ducts and round ducts over 18” diameter: sampling tube type
approved equilent, .
2. Round ducts up to 18” diameter: provide detector in airstream approved
equivalent.
D. Multiple Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades,
oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles,
stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel
closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft.

116
E. Operators: UL listed and labeled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts,
single phase, 60 Hz. Operator shall be Belimo, no equivalent. Locate damper
operator on exterior of duct and link to damper operating shaft.
F. Normally Open Smoke Responsive Fire Dampers: Curtain type, closing upon actuation
of electro thermal link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant
sealing pressure, stainless steel springs with locking devices to ensure positive closure
for units mounted horizontally.
G. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60
Hz; UL listed and labeled.
H. Manufacturer shall provide auxiliary contact for monitoring of damper position by fire
alarm system.
34.8 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Fabricated in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible, and as indicated.
1. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured
with continuous hinge or rod.
2. Operator: Minimum 3/8 inch square shaft with nylon end bearings at each end
to reduce air leakage.
B. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.
C. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8
x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized
channel frame with suitable hardware.
D. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 6 inches and smaller, provide nylon end
bearings on each end. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or
sintered bronze bearings.
E. Quadrants:
1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade
dampers. Regulator shall be equivalent to Sheet Metal Connectors Model RP-3,
with heavy-gauge steel regulator, wing nut locking assembly, and stamped dial
indicating damper position.
2. On externally insulated ducts, mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting
brackets, bases, or adapters to avoid damaging or compression of insulation.

117
3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches, provide regulator at both ends.
34.9 TAKEOFFS
A. Manufactured high-efficiency takeoff with 45-degree slope on the body, with gauge
thickness equal to adjacent ductwork.
34.10 GRAVITY BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving
Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturer’s standard construction.
B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: 16 gage thick
extruded aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl
sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball
bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying
differential static pressure.
34.11 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Factory fabricated.
2. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and
accessory materials shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-
developed index not exceeding 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
B. Shape: Rectangular straight with splitters or baffles. Match connecting ductwork sizes
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Rectangular Silencer Outer and Inner Casing: ASTM A 653/A 653M
D. Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism:
1. Dissipative type with fill material.
2. Fill Material: Moisture-proof nonfibrous material.
E. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or
otherwise react to system pressure variations. Do not use mechanical fasteners for
unit assemblies.
1. Joints: Flanged connections.
2. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame
in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
3. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
F. Source Quality Control: Test according to ASTM E 477.

118
35. EXECUTION
35.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
35.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and
follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to
Section for duct construction and pressure class.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel
accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts and stainless-steel accessories
in stainless-steel ducts.
C. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and
maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1. On both sides of duct coils.
2. Upstream from duct filters.
3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4. At drain pans and seals.
5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft
dampers, and equipment.
6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall
fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible
links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for
access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access
doors installed downstream from dampers.
7. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.
8. Control devices requiring inspection.
D. Unless duct access door size is explicitly indicated, provide minimum 24 x 18 inch size
duct access doors wherever possible. Provide 18 x 18, 12 x 12 inch or 8 x 8 inch size
elsewhere, using the largest size possible.
E. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
F. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing
purposes. Coordinate all test hole locations with client commissioning
representatives. Install with minimum 24” clear dimension from any side wall or
other obstruction.
G. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and smoke dampers at
locations indicated and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with

119
required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion
resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.
H. Coordinate installation of all fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and
smoke dampers with all other disciplines to ensure a minimum of 24”x24” clear
horizontal access area from the ceiling vertically to the damper. The clear access area
will be used for the inspection of damper fusible links and damper operators, as well
as for the resetting of damper. Clear access areas and appropriate wall/ceiling access
panels, if required, shall be clearly shown on the coordination drawings.
I. Provide turning vanes on all 90 Deg mitered elbows and splitter vanes on all radius
elbows unless the elbow has a center line radius of 1.5 times the width of the duct
(SMACNA type RE1 elbow).
J. Do not install any volume control, fire or combination fire/smoke dampers in fume
exhaust ducts.
K. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with
NFPA 92A.
L. All fire and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be commissioned (tested) in the
presence of Owner representative following installation and before the corresponding
fan systems are turned on. Contractor shall open all access doors for the inspection
and close all doors in the presence of the inspector.
M. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.
N. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated
with fans and motorized equipment, and supported by vibration isolators. Install
flexible connectors with adequate flexibility to allow for all thermal, axial, transverse
and torsional movement. Provide airtight seal. For fans developing static pressures
of 5.0 inches and over, cover connections with leaded vinyl sheet, held in place with
metal straps.
O. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
indicated on plans.
P. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
Q. Provide a high-efficiency takeoff with 45-degree entry for each branch connection.
R. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, unless
dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. Dampers
shall be fitted with quadrant control and standoff to extend through insulation. Omit
manual balancing damper at single diffuser served by a single air terminal box.

120
S. The use of splitter dampers is not acceptable.
T. Install remote damper actuators where the volume damper is not accessible. Field
paint the remote actuator cap to match the adjacent ceiling finish.
35.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Operate and test fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify
full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
All such tests shall be accomplished in the presence of a representative of BSM
commissioning team.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator
and damper.

121
HVAC VIBRATION CONTROL SYSTEM
36. GENERAL
36.1 Coordinate requirements of this specification with all other specifications and trades.
Requirements of this specification take precedence over other specification sections.
For example, the requirements of this section with regard to pipe supports in
mechanical rooms take precedence above the requirements of Section concerend.
36.2 This specification pertains to the furnishing and installation of vibration isolation
devices for rotating or reciprocating mechanical equipment and piping and conduit
systems attached thereto, and electrical transformers and attached switchgear and
conduit systems.
36.3 This work shall include all material and labor required for installation of the resilient
mounting and suspension systems, adjusting each mounting system, and
measurement of isolator system performance when so requested by the Architect.
Specific mounting arrangements for each item of mechanical and electrical equipment
shall be as described herein and as indicated by schedules and details on the drawings.
36.4 All vibration isolation equipment except for resilient pipe connectors, including steel
framing and reinforcing for concrete inertia bases and including steel rail bases, shall
be furnished by Noise Control. A single manufacturer for all vibration isolation
equipment will be required except as specifically approved in writing by the Architect
or by his specific approval of shop drawings or as specified herein. For resilient pipe
connectors refer to provisions of this specification that follow.
A. Vibration isolation systems.
36.6 REFERENCE SECTION FOR THE FOLLOWING GUIDELINES
A. References
B. Submittals
C. Delivery, storage and handling
36.7 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor and the vibration isolation manufacturer or his regularly designated
and factory authorized representative shall perform the following tasks in addition to
the supply and installation of isolation equipment:

122
1. Obtain from the Architect the approved manufacturer's name, model number,
and other necessary identifying data for each item of mechanical and electrical
equipment to be resiliently mounted. Coordinate all resilient mounting systems
with the exact equipment to be furnished in regard to physical size, isolator
locations, weight, rotating speed, etc. Direct contact and cooperation between
the vibration isolation device fabricator and the equipment manufacturer will be
required.
2. Obtain all necessary data in regard to piping systems which are to be resiliency
supported so that proper isolators can be selected. Select piping system isolators
for proper coordination with the physical arrangement of pipe lines and with the
physical characteristics of the building.
3. Submit shop drawings as required by other portions of this specification. These
drawings shall include specification information as follows:
a. Manufacturer's model number for each isolator, the machine or pipeline to
which it is to be applied, and the number of isolators to be furnished for
each machine or pipeline.
b. For steel spring mounts or hangers - Free height, deflected height, solid
height, isolator loading, and diameter of spring coil.
c. For elastomer or glass fiber isolators - Free height, deflected height, and
isolator loading.
d. Dimensional and weight data for concrete inertia bases, steel and rail
bases, and details of isolator attachment.
4. Provide on-the-job supervision as required during installation of resiliently
mounted equipment and piping to assure that all vibration isolators are installed
in strict accordance with normally accepted practices for critical environments.
5. Replace at no extra cost to the Owner any isolators which do not produce the
required deflection, are improperly loaded above or below their correct
operating height, or which in any way do not produce the required isolation.
6. Cooperate with all other Contractors engaged in this project so that the
installation of vibration isolation devices will proceed in a manner that is in the
best interests of the Owner.
7. Notify the Architect of any project conditions which affect vibration isolation
system installation or performance and which are found to be different from
conditions indicated by the drawings or described by the specifications. Should
vibration isolation system installation proceed without such notifications any
remedial work required to achieve proper isolator performance shall be
accomplished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
8. Be alert for possible "short-circuiting" of vibration isolation systems by piping
supports, electrical connections, temperature control connections, drain lines,
building construction, etc., and notify the involved contractor as to these
problems or potential problems. Where such situations cannot be easily
resolved, notify the Architect so that preventive or remedial action can take
place on a timely basis. Any remedial measures required shall be undertaken by
the contractor responsible at no additional cost to the Owner.

123
9. This specification does not include provisions for seismic restraints that might be
required by isolations systems due to the geographic location of the project,
building codes, or other considerations.
37. PRODUCTS
37.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION SYSTEMS:
1. General:
a. The vibration isolation systems described herein and identified by type
letter designations shall be applied to specific classifications of mechanical
and electrical equipment as indicated by Section concerend of this
document.
b. The minimum static deflection of the isolators for each classification of
mechanical or electrical equipment shall be as indicated by Section C of
this document or as otherwise indicated herein.
2. Type A Isolation:
a. The equipment shall be rigidly mounted on a large reinforced concrete
inertia base which has length and width dimensions approximately 20%
greater than the supported equipment. The inertia base and equipment
shall be supported by steel spring vibration isolators. Brackets for the
spring isolators shall be located off the sides of the inertia base or integral
with the perimeter of the inertia base with the tops of the springs near the
vertical center of gravity of the equipment and inertia block; or if the
center of gravity is higher than the top of the inertia base, the tops of the
springs shall be at the top of the inertia base. The spring isolators shall rest
on curbs or pedestals if necessary. There shall be a 2 inch minimum space
between the bottom of the inertia base and the top of the housekeeping
pad or floor slab when a housekeeping pad is not indicated to be
employed.
b. Concrete inertia bases shall be formed by a welded steel channel frame
which incorporates prelocated equipment anchor bolts, and reinforcing
bars in each direction welded in place. Concrete shall be standard 150-160
Ib/cu.ft. structural concrete. The base thickness shall be determined by the
weight requirements but it shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span
between isolators or 6 inches, whichever is greater. For centrifugal and
axial fans and centrifugal pumps the inertia base shall have a minimum
weight equal to that of the isolated equipment. For reciprocating
equipment the inertia base shall have a minimum weight equal to twice
the weight of the equipment.
c. Springs shall be of the free standing unhoused type. Horizontal spring
stiffness shall not be less than 0.8 of vertical stiffness. Springs shall be
selected for reasonably uniform deflection taking into consideration any
difference in machine weight at each supporting point, but deflection of

124
each spring shall not be less than that specified for each classification of
mechanical equipment. The spring deflection from the point of rated
deflection to the point at which the spring is solid shall not be less than 1/2
of the rated static deflection. The yield point of the steel used in the
springs shall be sufficiently great so that the springs may be compressed to
shorted turns without danger of spring failure. At least two layers of ribbed
waffle pattern neoprene pads or equivalent glass fiber pads shall be
installed under the base plate of each spring isolator. Springs shall have
leveling bolts and proper means for bolting to the machines. To prevent
corrosion, springs for outdoor installation shall be galvanized or otherwise
coated as approved by the Architect
.
3. Type B Isolation:
a. The equipment shall be rigidly mounted on wide flange or channel
structural steel members which shall run perpendicular to any support
channels or similar members which are an integral portion of the
equipment, or which shall be fabricated to form a complete frame for
machine mounting. Height saving spring mounting brackets shall be
welded to the ends of the structural steel saddle members or to the sides
of structural steel frames to attach free standing steel spring isolators.
Unless otherwise approved, the depth of the structural steel saddle
members or the perimeter members of mounting frames shall be at least
one-tenth of the longest frame dimension.
b. Steel spring isolators shall be as specified for Type A isolation.
c. Minimum clearance between the steel base and the housekeeping pad or
floor shall be 2 inches.
4. Type C Isolation:
a. The equipment shall be rigidly mounted in a steel frame which is
sufficiently stiff so that it may be supported on resilient isolators without
distortion of the frame or misalignment of the equipment. If the
equipment has an integral frame which is suitably rigid, the resilient
isolators may be secured directly to the integral equipment frame or base.
b. Isolators shall be selected on the basis of the required static deflection as
scheduled or otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1) Required deflection 0.25 to 0.4 inches - double deflection neoprene-
in-shear isolators.
2) Required deflection 0.5 inches and greater - steel spring isolators as
specified for the Type A mounting.
c. Isolators shall be selected for reasonably uniform deflection taking into
consideration any difference in machine weight at each supporting point,

125
but deflection shall not be less than that specified for each classification of
equipment.
d. Minimum clearance between the equipment base and the house keeping
pad or floor shall be 2 inches.
e. Type D Isolation:
f. The equipment shall be mounted on resilient "pads". These pads shall be
multiple layers of waffle or ribbed neoprene, neoprene and cork sandwich,
or precompressed glass fiber with height and stiffness as required to
provide the static deflection as scheduled or specified and as required to
properly support the load.
g. Pads shall be loaded in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and sized to achieve this recommended loading. The
equipment weight at each sup porting point shall be considered in
selecting pad dimensions along with the recommended loading.
5. Type E Isolation:
a. The equipment shall be suspended with steel spring vibration isolators
which are complete with neoprene-in-shear isolators for high frequency
noise control. The neoprene-in-shear isolators shall provide static
deflection of 0.20 inches minimum. In addition, elastomer washers shall be
furnished as necessary to prevent metal-to-metal contact.
b. Hanger rod misalignment of up to 15 degrees relative to vertical shall not
cause "short-circuiting" of the isolation components due to metal-to-metal
contact.
c. Spring hangers shall utilize free standing springs which are unhoused
except for the required partial and open housing assembly. Spring hangers
shall be selected for reasonably uniform deflection taking into
consideration any difference in machine weight at each supporting point,
but deflection of each hanger shall not be less than that specified for each
classification of mechanical equipment. The spring deflection from the
point of rated deflection to the point at which the spring is solid shall not
be less than one-half of the rated static deflection. The yield point of the
steel used in the springs shall be sufficiently great so that the springs may
be compressed to shorted turns without danger of spring failure.
d. Resilient hangers shall be installed as near as possible to the supporting
overhead structure. The machine suspension points shall be in a rigid and
heavy portion of the building structure. Suspension of machines from
lightweight floor slabs shall be avoided, particularly at the center of
structural spans.
e. Suspension rods shall be attached to rigid members of the machine
structure. When such attachment points do not exist, a heavy steel

126
framework shall be furnished to support the machine with suspension rods
attached to this framework.
6. Type F Isolation:
a. The equipment shall be suspended with double deflection neoprene-in-
shear hangers which are complete with elastomer washers as required to
prevent metal-to-metal contact.
b. Hangers shall be installed as near as possible to the supporting overhead
structure. Suspension points shall be on a rigid portion of both the
overhead structure and equipment framework.
7. Type G Isolation:
a. This mounting shall be the same as the Type E mounting except that the
suspended machine shall be supported by a concrete inertia base.
Suspension rods shall be attached to the concrete base.
8. Type K Isolation (Curb Mounted Roof-top Air Conditioning Machines):
B. The roof-top air conditioning machine shall be mounted on a free standing steel spring
isolated rectangular rail (curb) system. The isolation system shall be suitable for
outdoor unprotected locations and it shall include a soft and flexible elastomer air and
water seal which shall not short circuit the spring isolators. The isolation system shall
not allow lateral movement greater than 5/8 inch for wind loads up to 100 miles per
hour. Suitable systems of this type are Kinetics Noise Control .
1. Type L Isolation (Water Chillers and Similar Equipment):
a. Same as Type C except that steel spring isolators shall employ vertical limit
stops with provisions to prevent short circuiting of the limit stops when the
springs are loaded normally.
38. EXECUTION
38.1 GENERAL
38.2 EXAMINATION

127
A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual
locations before installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
38.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements in Mechanical division "Roof Accessories" for installation
of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
B. Equipment Restraints:
1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where
clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
C. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to
provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged
to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are
attached to wall.
E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to
structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete
members.
F. Drilled-in Anchors:
1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling
holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items
during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or
other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid
prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has
achieved full design strength.
3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation.
Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the
structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.
4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior
to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom
of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid
introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.
5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

128
6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for
exterior applications.
38.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B. Adjust active height of spring isolators.
C. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of
operation.
38.5 RESILIENT MOUNTINGS FOR SPECIFIC CLASSIFICATIONS OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:
[Note to A/E: Fill in table with project specific requirements ]
EQUIPMENT LOCATION
ESTIMATED
MINIMUM
ROTATING SPEED
(RPM)
ISOLATION
TYPE
MINIMUM ACTUAL
STATIC DEFLECTION
(INCHES)

129
38.6 ISOLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
A. All piping and rigidly connected devices such as pressure reducing valves which
connects to resiliently mounted equipment shall be suspended with resilient hangers
or supported by floor mounted isolators for a distance of 100 pipe diameters from the
connected machine or within the mechanical equipment room, whichever is the
greater distance. The first three supports from the connected machine shall have the
same static deflection as indicated for the machine; the next two supports shall have
static deflection at least equal to one-half of the static deflection indicated for the
machine mounting, and remaining pipe supports shall provide static deflection of 0.35
inches minimum. These remaining isolators may be elastomer.
B. Steel spring hangers shall be as specified for Type E isolation except that a scale shall
be attached to the hanger housing to indicate deflection. Elastomer hangers shall be
as specified for Type F isolation. Floor mounts shall be free standing steel spring
isolators as specified for Type A isolation where static deflection in excess of 0.35
inches is required. Floor mounts, where static deflection of 0.35 inches or less is
required, shall be double deflection neoprene-in-shear as specified for Type C
isolation.
C. Vertical pipe risers shall be resiliently mounted, preferably with each riser anchored
near the center of the run. The risers shall be supported at the anchor points with
steel spring or double deflection neoprene-in-shear isolators which provide static
deflection of at least 0.35 inches. Isolators for the remainder of each run shall be steel
spring type specifically designed to control load shifting due to pipe expansion and
contraction. At least 0.35 inches deflection shall be maintained under all conditions.
D. Flexible synthetic rubber connectors shall be used to connect all piping to all isolated
equipment. Flexible synthetic rubber connectors shall be fabricated using peroxide
cured EPDM synthetic rubber and tire cord reinforcement . . Resilient connectors
shall be selected for the pressure rating and temperature rating appropriate for the
particular piping and pipe contents. Where synthetic EPDM flexible connectors are
not permitted by code due to pipe contents and/or pressures provide swing pipe
connectors changing direction a minimum of 3 times before joining isolated
equipment. Swing connections should be made within approximately 6 feet of the
isolated equipment.
E. Drain connections from isolated equipment to floor drains shall be at least 1" free
from drain or use rubber hose.
38.7 ISOLATION OF AIR SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTS
A. Sheet metal air handling ducts shall be connected to air handlers with resilient
connectors and such ducts shall be suspended with resilient hangers or supported by
floor mounted isolators for a distance of 30 feet from the connected machine or

130
within the mechanical equipment room whichever is the greater distance. The first
three supports from the connected machine shall have the same static deflection as
indicated for the machine; the next two supports shall have static deflection at least
equal to one-half of the static deflection indicated for the machine mounting, and
remaining pipe supports shall provide static deflection of 0.35 inches minimum. These
remaining isolators may be elastomer.
B. Steel spring hangers shall be as specified for Type E isolation. Elastomer hangers shall
be as specified for Type F isolation. Floor mounts shall be free standing steel spring
isolators as specified for Type A isolation where static deflection in excess of 0.35
inches is required. Floor mounts, where static deflection of 0.35 inches or less is
required, shall be double deflection neoprene-in-shear as specified for Type C
isolation.
38.8 ISOLATION OF FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER EQUIPMENT:
All fractional horsepower fans, pumps, etc., which are mounted on or suspended
from floors that are not on-grade shall be isolated with neoprene-in-shear
isolators furnished by the vibration isolation supplier except where such isolators
are furnished as an integral part of the machine.

131
PLUMBING WORKS SPECFICATION
39. GENERAL
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Sanitary waste and vent piping system.
D. Sump pump discharge piping system.
E. Water piping systems.
F. Process cooling water systems.
G. Storm water piping system.
H. Natural gas piping system.
1. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
2. All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark
of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) and be listed by NSF International.
B. References
C. Submittals
A. Perform Work in accordance with International Plumbing Code.

132
40. PRODUCTS
40.1 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, hub-and-spigot, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A74, service weight.
2. Joints: ASTM C564 neoprene compression gasket system equivalent to Tyler Pipe
Ty-Seal or Charlotte Pipe “Char-Seal”.
40.2 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888 and CISPI 301, hubless, service weight for piping.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A888 and CISPI 301, service weight.
2. Couplings: Heavy duty couplings conforming to ASTM C 1540. Gaskets shall
conform to ASTM C564.
40.3 SUMP PUMP DISCHARGE PIPING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze or ASTM B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
40.4 WATER PIPING, BURIED
A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint bell and plain
spigot end. Pipe and fittings shall have ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4, cement-mortar
lining for ductile-iron pipe and fittings for water. Pipe and fittings shall also have
ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, polyethylene encasement for ductile iron pipe systems.
Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze or ASTM B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron
standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Provide
manufacturer’s restraining joint system equivalent to U.S. Pipe HP-Lok. Ductile
Iron (3” and larger) Pex (buried and sleeved)
2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
B. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot
end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. Pipe and fittings shall have
ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4, cement-mortar lining for ductile-iron pipe and fittings for
water. Pipe and fittings shall also have ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5, polyethylene
encasement for ductile iron pipe systems.
1. Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard
pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern. Provide manufacturer’s
restraining joint system equivalent to U.S. Pipe HP-Lok.
2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

133
40.5 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast bronze, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and
bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, lead-free solder, Grade 95TA, for piping 1-1/2” and smaller.
AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze, for piping 2” and larger.
Minimum 15% silver bearing filler material for copper-to-copper joints.
Minimum 45% silver bearing filler material for dissimilar metal joints.
B. PROCESS COOLING WATER SYSTEMS
1. See hydronic piping specification, section
C. STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
D. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, hub-and-spigot, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A74, service weight.
2. Joints: ASTM C564 neoprene gasket system equivalent to Tyler Pipe Ty-Seal or
Charlotte Pipe “Char-Seal”.
40.6 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888 and CISPI 301, hubless, service weight for piping.
1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A888 and CISPI 301, service weight.
2. Couplings: Heavy duty couplings conforming to ASTM C 1540. Gaskets shall
conform to ASTM C564.
40.7 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.
2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9,
ASME
Sec 1.

134
40.8 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches:
1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed
neoprene gaskets.
C. Dielectric Connections: Where connecting ferrous and non-ferrous piping materials,
use “ClearFlow” nipples to separate piping materials.
40.9 SWING CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, 125 psig working pressure.
B. Over 2 Inches: Cast iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat,
flanged ends.
40.10 BALL VALVES
A. Up to and including 4 inches: Bronze two piece body, chrome plated steel full-port
ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle.
40.11 GATE VALVES
A. 3 Inches and larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, single
wedge, flanged ends. Class 125, MSS SP-70.
B. Chainwheel: On valves 6” and larger and installed higher than 8-feet above finished
floor, provide sprocket rim, brackets, and chain compatible with valve.
40.12 STRAINERS
A. Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed bronze body for 250 psig working pressure, Y pattern
with 20-mesh stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 2-1/2 inch and larger: Flanged cast iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y
pattern with 3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
40.13 GAS VALVES
A. Gas Cocks 2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi WOG, bronze body, straightaway pattern,
square head, threaded ends.

135
B. Gas Cocks 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-78; 175 psi, lubricated plug type, semi-steel
body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends.
C. Solenoid Valves: Aluminum body, 120 volts AC, 60 Hz, Class B continuous duty
molded coils; NEMA 4 coil enclosure; electrically opened/electrically closed; dual coils;
normally closed; UL and FM approved and labeled.
D. Gas Line Pressure Regulators: Single stage, steel or aluminum jacketed, corrosion-
resistant gas pressure regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with
threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for inlet
and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow indicated.
40.14 CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVES
A. Pre-Set Balance Feature. Valves to be designed to allow Installing Contractor to pre-
set balance points for proportional system balance prior to system start-up in
accordance with scheduled flow rates.
B. Valve Design and Construction. All valves shall have a calibrated orifice or venturi
section, two ¼” threaded pressure tap ports with integral seals, and memory stop to
retain the set position. Valves should be rated for 125 psig working pressure and 250
Deg. F maximum operating temperature.
C. Valves shall be selected based on flowrate, not on pipe size dimensions.
D. Preformed Insulation. All vales to be provided with molded insulation to permit
access for balance and read-out.
40.15 DRAIN VALVES
A. Equipped with hose adaptor fitting and cap.
41. EXECUTION
41.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
41.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
41.3 INSTALLATION

136
A. Any interior natural gas pressure regulators shall be vented to the exterior of the
building per NFPA 54 / ANSI Z223.1.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
D. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
E. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
G. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors as follows:
1. Install schedule 40 pipe sleeves at fire rated walls and floors. Seal with UL
approved fire stopping material as specified or approved
2. Install minimum 18 gage pipe sleeves at non rated walls.
3. Sleeves through floors should extend a minimum of 2” above finished floor.
4. Sleeves through walls should be flush with the wall surface.
5. All sleeves should be large enough to has insulated piping with crushing the
insulation.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
I. Vent pipes shall extend minimum 12” above finish roof line or as required by code.
J. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
K. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
L. Establish elevations of buried sanitary and storm piping outside the building to ensure
not less than 3 ft of cover.
M. Establish elevations of buried water piping outside the building to ensure not less
than 5 ft of cover.
N. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
O. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish
painting.
P. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.
Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

137
R. Extend chains on valves with chainwheel operators down to maximum 5-feet above
finished floor.
S. Install cast iron soil pipe in accordance with the “Cast Iron Soil Pipe Handbook” latest
edition, as published by the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
T. Install strainers in horizontal pipe or in vertical pipe such that flow is downward. Do
not install strainers in vertical pipe with flow upward.
U. Install cast iron piping system according to CISPI Handbook.
V. Install copper tubing under building slab according to "Copper Tube Handbook."
Install ball valve directly upstream of each floor slab penetration.
W. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or
AWWA C105.
X. Install ball valve at all laboratory water connections to fume hoods and other
laboratory equipment.
Y. Install natural gas shutoff valves at each required piece of equipment. Provide gas
regulators as necessary to accommodate equipment pressure requirements.
Coordinate with equipment vendor.
Z. Install plastic pipe below grade in accordance with ASTM D2321.
41.4 APPLICATION
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Install valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, and vertical risers.
C. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
D. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
E. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.
F. Provide flow control valves in water recirculating systems where indicated. Balance
flow to maintain hot water at all plumbing fixtures.
41.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum or as
indicated on drawings. Maintain gradients.
B. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

138
41.6 PLUMBING PIPING PRESSURE TESTING
A. Test for leaks and defects all new plumbing piping systems and parts of existing
systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. Submit copy of Pipe
Pressure Test Log provided in pressure testing section for each section of piping
tested. Refer to International Plumbing Code for general pipe pressure testing
requirements (i.e., test pressure gauges, inspections, etc.).
B. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced piping until
it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing that has been
covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.
C. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest all plumbing systems until
satisfactory results are obtained.
D. Natural Gas Piping System.
1. Test in accordance with International Fuel Gas Code, NFPA 54, and local utility
requirements.
41.7 DISINFECTION OF WATER PIPING SYSTEMS
A. After water systems have been pressure tested and flushed, each system (including
distribution system to building) shall be cleaned and disinfected per AWWA C651.
Note that procedures shall require two (2) consecutive sets of acceptable samples
taken at least 24 hours apart.
B. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from outlets and from water
entry per AWWA 651, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
C. Samples shall be subject to bacteriological testing by a recognized 3rd
party testing
agency. Send test reports to Owner for review. If unsatisfactory bacteriological
results are found, the system shall be disinfected and retested again until satisfactory
results are obtained.
41.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary and storm sewer services. Before commencing work check
invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that
these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new water service complete with approved backflow preventer and water
meter with by-pass valves.
1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and seal at wall/floor with mechanical
sleeve seals. Anchor service main inside to concrete wall/floor.
Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators

139
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
42. GENERAL
A. Backflow preventers.
B. Expansion tanks.
C. Cleanouts.
D. Potable water pressure booster systems.
E. Water hammer arresters.
F. Floor drains and floor sinks.
G. Installation requirements of other plumbing specialties scheduled in Plumbing Fixture
Schedule.
H. Catch basins and manholes.
B. References
C. Submittals
43. PRODUCTS
43.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers
1. Standard: ASSE 1013.
2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

140
3. Body: Bronze for 2” and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for 2-1/2” and larger.
4. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
5. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and
smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and
outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
b. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.
6. Manufacturers: approved.
B. Double-Check Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:
1. Standard: ASSE 1015.
2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
5. Accessories:
a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and
smaller; outside screw and yoke gate-type with flanged ends on inlet and
outlet of NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
6. Manufacturers: approved
43.2 BLADDER-TYPE EXPANSION TANKS
A. Construction: Welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME SEC 8 D;
supplied with National Board Form U 1, rated for working pressure of 125 psig, with
flexible butyl rubber bladder sealed into tank and steel support stand.
B. Accessories: Pressure gauge and air-charging fitting, tank drain.
C. Manufacturer: approved
D.
.
43.3 POTABLE WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEMS.
A. All piping, fittings and booster pump wetted surfaces are to be non-ferrous, except
that stainless steel materials may be used.
B. Booster pumps are to be skid mounted packaged duplex assemblies with variable
frequency drives. The pump motors are to be factory fitted with shaft grounding
assemblies.

141
43.4 CLEANOUTS
A. Exterior Surfaced Areas: Round or Square cast nickel bronze access frame and
non-skid cover.
B. Interior Finished Floor Areas: cast iron body and frame, nickel bronze top to
accommodate the following floor finishes as required:
1. Exposed rim type with recess to receive terrazzo or resilient floor finish.
2. Exposed finish type with standard mill finish.
3. Exposed flush type with standard scored or abrasive finish.
4. Concealed undercarpet flush type with mill finish and carpet marker.
C. Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with cast iron body and round gasket cover and
round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
D. Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Caulked or threaded type.
43.5 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
B. Type: approved.
C. Size: Size per manufacturer recommendations.
43.6 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR SINKS
A. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule for required product information.
43.7 OTHER SPECIALTIES
A. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule for required product information.
44. EXECUTION
44.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate cutting and forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to
required invert elevations.
44.2 INSTALLATION
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs
with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of
drainage system.

142
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Pipe relief from backflow preventers to nearest drain.
E. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-
gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two
pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to either building exterior or floor drain
(coordinate with plans). Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow
preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.
F. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve according to
PDI-WH 201 and as shown on drawings.
G. Provide final certification for all testable backflow preventers, after installation, by
certified cross connection device tester.
H. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains
flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
J. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.
Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
1. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-
inch total depression.
2. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.
3. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than
1-inch total depression.
K. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
44.3 TESTING
A. Test and certify all backflow preventers for proper operation..
1. Test shall be completed within 30 days of installation or Substantial Completion,
whichever is later.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
45. GENERAL
A. Installation requirements of plumbing fixtures scheduled in Plumbing Fixture
Schedule.

143
B. Plumbing fixture carriers.
A. References
B. Submittals
C. Quality Assurance
D. Delivery, Storage and Handling
45.3 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by
the manufacturer.
B. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of
countertop lavatories and sinks.
46. PRODUCTS
46.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule for all required product information.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers
1. Flush Valves: approved Automatic with battery power.
2. Lavatory Faucets:approved
3. Water Cooler / Bottle Filler: approved
C. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all roof drains are compatible with roof
types and roof insulation. Refer to architectural and structural plans for roof
information. No additional compensation will be allowed for failure to coordinate
roof drains with roof types.
46.2 PLUMBING FIXTURE CARRIERS
A. All wall mounted fixtures such as urinals, water closets, lavatories, drinking fountains,
electric water coolers, etc. shall be installed with compatible carriers. All carriers shall
be commercial or industrial grade and shall be suitable for the fixture served, space
available and building construction. All carriers shall extend to the floor and be
anchored into the slab.
B. Water closet carriers shall be heavy-duty type, rated for a minimum of 750 lbs.
47. EXECUTION

144
47.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
47.2 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in
fixture rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
47.3 INSTALLATION
B. Install each fixture with trap with 2 slip joints, easily removable for servicing and
cleaning.
C. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with stops, reducers, and
escutcheons.
D. Install components level and plumb.
E. Install and secure fixtures in place with scheduled wall supports or wall carriers and
bolts.
F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant, color to match fixture.
47.4 WATER CLOSET INSTALLATION
Water-Closet Installation:
Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for
handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. Coordinate exact locations
with drawings.
Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and
maintenance.
Support Installation:
Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.
Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly
and waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.
Flushometer-Valve Installation:

145
Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.
Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle
mounted on open side of water closet.
Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished
locations and within cabinets and millwork.
Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Joint Sealing:
Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant.
Match sealant color to water-closet color.
47.5 URINAL INSTALLATION
A. Urinal Installation:
Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports.
Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the
handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. Coordinate exact locations
with drawings.
Support Installation:
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.
Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.
Flushometer-Valve Installation:
Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.
Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished
locations.

146
Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Joint Sealing:
Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-
resistant silicone sealant.
Match sealant color to urinal color.
47.6 LAVATORY AND SINK INSTALLATION
A. Install lavatories and sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories and sinks.
Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for
people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. Coordinate exact
locations with drawings.
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Seal joints between lavatories/sinks, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.
Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping
of accessible lavatories and sinks.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each faucet.
Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with
lavatory/sink.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

147
47.7 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Review shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before
rough-in and installation.
47.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing,
noise, or overflow.
B. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
water closets, fittings, and controls.
C. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.
D. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
47.9 CLEANING
A. Directly prior to project turnover, clean plumbing fixtures and fittings with
manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.
B. Install protective covering for installed water closets, urinals, and fittings.
Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for use during construction unless approved in
writing by Owner
PLUMBING HANGER & SUPPORT
48. GENERAL
A. Pipe and equipment hangers, supports, anchors, saddles and shields.
B. Equipment supports.
C. Equipment roof curbs.
D. Equipment roof supports.
E. Sleeves and seals.
F. Mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.
H. Sealants, firestop insulation, putty and compounds.

148
I. Mechanical seals.
B. References.
C. Submittals.
48.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping.
B. ANSI/AMSE B31.9 – Building Services Piping.
C. MSS SP-58 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
D. MSS SP-69 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application.
E. MSS SP-89 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation Practices.
A. References
B. Submittals
C. Delivery, storage and handling
D. Quality Assurance
49. PRODUCTS
A. Plumbing Piping:
1. Conform to International Plumbing Code, International Fuel Gas Code, ASME
B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69 and MSS SP89 as applicable.
B. Pure Water Piping and Laboratory Waste and Vent Piping:

149
1. Conform to manufacturer’s recommendations, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89,
as applicable.
C. Natural Gas Piping:
1. Conform to International Fuel Gas Code, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89, as
applicable.
D. Compressed Air, Vacuum, and Laboratory Gas (Nitrogen, Argon, Helium, etc.) Piping:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS SP89, as applicable.
E. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated
components.
2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot
dipped.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or
liner.
4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion
to support bearing surface of piping.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon
steel.
F. Copper Pipe Hangers:
1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-
fabricated components.
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-
coated steel.
G. Hangers and Supports:
1. Hangers for Hot and Cold Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch, Carbon steel, adjustable
swivel, band type.
2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable,
clevis.
3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches; Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. , cast iron roll, double hanger.
5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and
hanger rods.
6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels
with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.
7. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches (150 mm) and Over: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

150
11. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple,
floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
12. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and
stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
15. Hangers for insulated pipe shall be enlarged to compensate for insulation
thickness so that hangers support insulation. See Section concerend.
16. See Section concerend for vibration isolation hangers and supports.
49.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly
made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods,
nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
49.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:
1. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting
multiple parallel pipes.
2. Standard: MFMA-4.
3. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.
4. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit
into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
49.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS
A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use
in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
49.5 PIPE STANDS
A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of
manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-
shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

151
C. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof
installation without membrane penetration.
D. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:
1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
2. Base: Plastic.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel,
continuous-thread rods.
4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or
stainless-steel, roller-type pipe support.
E. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:
1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
2. Bases: One or more; plastic.
3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from
structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on
permanent stationary roof curb.
49.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from
structural carbon-steel shapes.
49.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength
49.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous
threaded.

152
49.9 INSERTS
49.10 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-
psig minimum compressive strength or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1
polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.
B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-
psig minimum compressive strength or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1
polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.
C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of
pipe.
D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
49.11 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel.
B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage galvanized steel.
C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet buty; compatible with roofing.
D. Floor Drain and Floor Sink Flashing: 40 mil thick chlorinated polyethylene (CPE),
equivalent to Chloraloy.
E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
49.12 EQUIPMENT CURBS
wood nailer. Minimum 18 inch height, unless specified otherwise.
49.13 EQUIPMENT ROOF CURBS

153
wood nailer. Minimum 24 inch height above top of insulation (not the roof structure).
49.14 EQUIPMENT ROOF SUPPORTS
wood nailer. Minimum 24 inch height above top of insulation (not the roof structure).
49.15 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire
Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
B. Firestop Putty: Non-harding, non shrinking, UL listed.
D. Sealants:
A. Mechanical Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve,
connected with type 316 stainless steel bolts and reinforced plastic polymer pressure
plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing a
watertight and gas-tight seal and electrical insulation. Provide Advance Products &
Systems approved.
solid water stop, Advance Products & System.

154
resistant coating, Advance Products & Systems approved
2. Provide high-temperature silicone links rated for 400 Deg. F for steam and
condensate applications.
50. EXECUTION
50.1 INSTALLATION
50.2 INSERTS
inches.
with slab.
A. Reference applicable codes for maximum support spacing; . Additional supports shall
be provided at other locations as specified in this Section.
B. Reference applicable codes for maximum support spacing; see Additional supports
shall be provided at other locations as specified in this Section.
C. Support grooved pipe adjacent to each joint and at other locations per manufacturer
recommendations.
D. Support piping adjacent to large pipe accessories such as valves, air separators, traps,
etc. Provide additional supports as recommended by accessory manufacturer.
E. Independently support valves 16” and larger.
F. Install all hangers, supports, and accessories that shall be attached to structural steel
prior to the application of structural steel fireproofing. Repair fireproofing if damaged
during remainder of project.

155
G. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
H. Support fire protection systems piping independently from other piping systems. Fire
with the Sprinkler Contractor.
I. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
J. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
K. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
L. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.
M. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at
hub.
N. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
O. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
P. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for non-insulated copper pipe.
Q. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
R. Prime coat steel hangers and supports in the mechanical room and other exposed
S. Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve specified
pipe slopes.
T. Space hangers for pure water and laboratory waste and vent systems to avoid pipe
sags. Use manufacturer-recommended V-groove channel if necessary to maintain
sag-free installation.
U. Saddles, Shields and Inserts
1. Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining
pipe insulation.

156
2. Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold piping that has vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees (360 degrees on trapeze hangers with U-
bolt clamps) and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following:
NPS LENGTH THICKNESS
1 through 3-1/2 12 0.048
4 12 0.060
5 & 6 18 0.060
8 through 14 24 0.075
16 through 24 24 0.105
3. Pipes 8 inches and larger shall have wood inserts.
4. Insert materials shall be at least as long as the protective shield.
5. Provide manufacturer-recommended saddles, inserts, and/or shields where
cellular foam insulation is used. The removal of sections of cellular foam
insulation for the purpose of pipe support is not acceptable.
V. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping
from the building structure.
W. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89.
Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on
field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.
1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe
size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for
individual pipe hangers.
2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads
being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
X. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping,
and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
Y. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated
piping.
Z. Fastener System Installation:
1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete
slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.
Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating
manual.

157
2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and
completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
AA. Pipe Stand Installation:
1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount
on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand
and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb.
BB. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts,
rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
CC. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
DD. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of
piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to
facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar
units.
EE. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
FF. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install
additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,
NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts
before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through
openings at top of inserts.
GG. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
HH. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not
exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
II. Insulated Piping:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project
through insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger
shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building
services piping.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier
is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

158
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.
Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
f. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-
insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.
g. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping
insulation.
50.4 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those
permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to
B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to
structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS Standards D1.1.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with
expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to
compensators.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal
pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends.
Make provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion
and contraction of piping.
50.5 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork
penetrate weather or waterproofed walls and floors.
B. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with CPE membrane, a
minimum of 12 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten
flashing to drain clamp device.
C. Seal floor, shower, mop sink, etc. drains watertight to adjacent materials.
D. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars
above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

159
50.6 SLEEVES
penetrations and wall penetrations into exposed areas. Pipe and duct sleeves are not
required for penetrations through non-rated concealed partitions.
B. At the Contractor’s option, pipe sleeves may be omitted if the wall or floor is core
drilled, except in areas potentially exposed to wet conditions (such as mechanical
rooms, loading dock, generator room, penthouse, kitchen, etc.).
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E. Sleeves through floors shall be grinded flush with finish floor level. In areas
potentially exposed to wet conditions (such as mechanical rooms, loading dock,
generator room, penthouse, kitchen, etc.), sleeve shall extend a minimum of 2” above
finish floor.
F. Where piping penetrates non-rated ceilings or walls, close off space between pipe or
duct and adjacent work with urethane rod stock and caulk air tight.
G. Seal pipe penetrations through non-rated floors.
H. Where piping penetrates rated floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or
duct with appropriate fire rated sealant, insulation, putty or compound. Refer to the
Drawings for fire/smoke rated wall locations and the appropriate ratings.
I. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons on piping at finished surfaces.
J. Waste, vent and storm pipe penetrations through the concrete floor slab shall be
encased in the poured concrete slab.
K. PVC pipe casing around the cold and hot water and gas piping shall be encased in
poured concrete when penetrating the floor slab. Seal the opening between the
piping and PVC casing with putty or rigid polyisocyanurate insulation plug and seal
with caulking.

160
L. Provide mechanical seals and sleeves through exterior wall and floor penetrations and
50.7 HANGER SPACING AND SIZE
A. Reference International Plumbing Code and International Fuel Gas Code where
applicable.
B. Reference manufacturer’s recommendations for pure water piping and laboratory
waste and vent piping.
C. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
D. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment
that will not have field-applied finish.
E. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
F. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal
framing systems and attachments for general service applications.
1. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for
copper piping and tubing.
G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as
specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Pipe Hangers
a. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of
noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
b. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to
allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
c. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For
suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
d. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
e. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
f. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For
suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
g. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

161
h. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30,
from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and
contraction might occur.
i. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-
1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by
expansion and contraction might occur.
j. Vee Bottom Clevis Hanger: For suspension of flexible plastic piping,
Cooper B-Line B3106 or equivalent. Include plastic pipe support channel,
Cooper B-Line B3106V.
2. Pipe Clamps
a. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For
suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to
4 inches of insulation.
b. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS
1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
c. Wall or Ceiling Mounted Pipe Strap/Clamp (MSS Type 26): For support of
insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction.
3. Pipe Supports
a. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36,
with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or
carbon-steel plate.
b. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS
36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or
carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
c. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type
support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required,
with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
d. Pipe Rollers (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur
but vertical adjustment is not necessary.
e. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS
24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.
f. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes
NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might
be required in addition to expansion and contraction.
J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24.
2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers
NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

162
K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various
types of building attachments.
5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to
suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-
joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of
beams.
4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if
loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.
5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. Shall only be connected to
bottom joist chord if weight is 200 lbs or less.
6. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads. Shall only be connected to bottom joist chord if
weight is 200 lbs or less.
7. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of
steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. Shall only be connected to
bottom joist chord if weight is 200 lbs or less.
8. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel. Shall only be connected to bottom joist chord if weight is 200
lbs or less.
9. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from
above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
10. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is
required.
M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): For protection of pipe
insulation; depth of saddle to be larger than insulation thickness. Fill interior
voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

163
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by
manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping
movement.
2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not
exceed 1-1/4 inches.
3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger
with springs.
4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping
system from hanger.
6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping
system from base support.
7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and
limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping
system from trapeze support.
8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of
stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected
equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-
adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:
a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze
member.
O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections.
P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections.
Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
A. Provide mechanical seals and sleeves through exterior wall and floor penetrations,
and in 3-hour or higher fire rated partitions.
50.9 EQUIPMENT ROOF CURBS

164
A. Provide a equipment roof curb for each roof-mounted equipment item that does not
have integral equipment curb that would extend the bottom of the equipment a
minimum of 24” above the roof insulation. Coordinate location of roof supports with
equipment manufacturer.
B. Provide all necessary sealants and flashing required for a waterproof installation.
Coordinate with roof manufacturer and other trades.
50.10 EQUIPMENT ROOF SUPPORTS
A. Provide a minimum of two equipment roof supports for each roof-mounted
equipment item that does not have integral equipment rails that would extend the
bottom of the equipment a minimum of 24” above the roof insulation. Coordinate
location of roof supports with equipment manufacturer.
B. Provide all necessary sealants and flashing required for a waterproof installation.
Coordinate with roof manufacturer and other trades.
50.11 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to
support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface
smooth.
C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
50.12 METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and
equipment supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc
welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding
work; and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and
so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

165
50.13 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and
to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches

166
TOILIT BATH & LAUNDERY ACCESSRIES
51. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
Section Includes:
 Public-use washroom accessories.
 Staff use bath/wash room accessories.
 Private-use bathroom accessories.
 Custodial accessories.
Owner-Furnished Material: Items as designated in this section by Facilities Maintenance and
Operations Services
2. ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of
each accessory required.
Identify locations using room designations indicated.
Identify products using designations indicated.
3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
Warranty: if applicable .
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Maintenance data.
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: hand dryer etc Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location
and application.

167
5. WARRANTY
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
52. PRODUCTS
1. PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on
Drawings or comparable product approved
Paper Towel Dispenser
Basis-of-Design Product: approved
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Minimum Capacity: 8” wide up to 8” diameter roll paper towel.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Lockset: Tumbler type.
Waste Receptacle
Basis-of-Design Product approved
Minimum Capacity: 12 gal.
Liner: vinyl waste-receptacle liner.
Lockset: Tumbler type for waste-receptacle.
Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle
Basis-of-Design Product: 12 gallon waste receptacle or with 18 gallon waste
receptacle recessed touch free roll paper tower dispensers-No substitutions.
Mounting: Semi-recessed.
Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth.
Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 8” wide up to 8” diameter roll paper towel.
Liner: vinyl waste-receptacle liner.
Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle.
Soap Dispenser

168
approved.
Grab Bar
Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
Material: Stainless steel, 18-guage (1.2 mm) thick.
Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).
Configuration and Length: As indicated on BOQ.
Sanitary Napkin vendor dispensers
Sanitary Napkin approved
Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit
Mounting: [Recessed] [Partition mounted, dual access] .
Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover with tumbler lockset.
Receptacle: Removable.
Material and Finish: [Stainless steel, No. 4 finish]
Seat-Cover Dispenser
Basis-of-Design Product: approved.
Mounting: Surface mounted
Mirror Unit
Tilt Mirror for Handicapped Lavatory:
Size: [As indicated on Drawings].
Mirror:
Size: [As indicated on Drawings]
Diaper-Changing Station
Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with
child-protection strap.
Engineered to support a minimum of [250-lb (113-kg)] static load when opened.

169
Mounting: [Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches (100 mm)
from wall when closed]
Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.
Liner Dispenser: Built in.
Shower Curtain Rod
Description: [1-inch (25.4-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.0375-inch- (0.95-mm-)
thick stainless steel
Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners
Finish: [No. 4 (satin)] .
Shower Curtain
Basis-of-Design Product: aproved
Size: (specifier select)
Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.
Grommets: Corrosion resistant at minimum 6 inches (152 mm) o.c. through top hem.
Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless-steel, spring wire curtain hooks
with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate specified curtain rod. Provide one
hook per curtain grommet.
Folding Shower Seat
Towel Bar
Basis-of-Design Product: approved)
2. CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
Mop and Broom Holder
Mounting: above service sink, not on wall with faucet.
3. FABRICATION
If applicable to project need.

170
53. EXECUTION
1. INSTALLATION
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install
units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
FIRE FIGHTING SPECFICATION
54. GENERAL
A. This section describes Basic Fire Suppression Requirements required to provide for a
complete installation of all fire protection systems for this project. This section shall
apply to all other mechanical division specification sections as well as all work shown
on the drawings.
B. It is the intent of the Fire Protection Division of the Specifications that all mechanical
work specified herein is coordinated as required with the work of all other Divisions of
the Specifications and Drawings so that all installations operate as designed.
C. All systems shall be completely assembled, tested, adjusted and demonstrated to be
ready for operation to the satisfaction of the consultant.
D. The Contractor shall note that, in some cases, piping as shown on the Drawings
provide general location and routing information only. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing interference-free systems with proper clearance to facilities
and equipment.
E. Where the word “provide” is used, it shall mean “furnish and install” ess otherwise
noted or specified.
54.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and mechanical specification sections, apply to work of this
section and all other sections of mechanical divsion .
54.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The work included under this section consists of providing all labor, materials,

171
supervision, and construction procedures necessary for the installation of the
complete fire protection systems required by these specifications and/or shown on
the drawings of the contract.
B. The Contract Drawings are shown in part diagrammatic intended to convey the scope
of work, indicating the intended general arrangement of equipment, piping, etc.
A. Installers shall have at least 2 years of successful installation experience on projects
with fire protection installation work similar to that required by the project. All
equipment and materials shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and
shall be aligned, leveled, and adjusted for satisfactory operation, unless noted
otherwise in other fire protection sections.
B. Manufacturer of equipment and materials must be regularly engaged in the
manufacture of the specified equipment and material with similar construction and
capacities and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than five (5) years, unless noted otherwise in other Fire Protection Sections.
C. welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1.
"Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D. Quality welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
E. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping”, including all
addenda.
F. Comply with provisions of NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and NFPA 24, including all addenda.
G. Contractor signed welder certificate(s) shall be submitted. Certify that each welder
has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes involved and that
certification is current. A record shall be maintained on the job site showing the date
and results of qualification tests for each welder employed on the job. One certified
copy of the qualification test for each welder so employed shall be furnished to the
Owner’s representative.
54.5 REFERENCES
A. The design, manufacture, testing, and method of installation of all equipment and
materials furnished under the requirements of this specification shall, at minimum,
conform to the following as applicable:
1. Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.
2. Occupational Safety and Health Standards, National Consensus Standards and
Established Federal Standards.

172
3. ACGIH - American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists.
4. AIHA - American Industrial Hygiene Association.
5. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association.
6. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
7. ASA - Acoustical Society of American.
8. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning
Engineers.
9. ASME - The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
10. ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials.
11. CAGI - Compressed Air and Gas Institute.
12. CTI - Cooling Tower Institute.
13. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association.
14. ETL - Engineering Tests Laboratory.
15. HI - Hydraulic Institute.
16. HYD I - Hydronics Institute.
17. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials.
18. ICC – International Code Council.
19. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
20. NEC - National Electrical Code.
21. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
22. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
23. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation.
24. SAE - Society of Automatic Engineers.
25. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
26. TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.
27. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
28. International Plumbing Code.
29. International Mechanical Code.
30. Other governing, state, and local codes that apply.
54.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Follow the procedures specified in mechanical divsioin Sections "General
Conditions" and “Special Conditions”.
1. See Section for special submittal procedures for sprinkler/standpipe system
submittals.
B. The Architect/Engineer’s review of submittals, including any corrections or comments
made on the shop drawings during the review process, do not relieve Contractor from
compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. The review is only a
review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general
compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is
responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting
fabrication process and techniques of construction; coordinating his work with that of

173
all other trades; and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner. The
Contractor shall not be relieved from responsibility for errors or omissions in the shop
drawings, product data or samples by the Architect/Engineer’s review of those
drawings.
C. No portion of the work requiring submission of a shop drawing, product data or
sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been reviewed by the
Architect/Engineer. All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with
reviewed submittals and the associated manufacturer recommendations.
D. Shop drawings shall include the minimum following information as applies. Additional
specific information required is outlined in other Fire Protection Sections.
1. Certified performance and data with system operating conditions indicated.
2. All equipment items shall be marked with the same item number as used on
drawings or schedules.
3. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated
capacities of selected model clearly indicating, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up
instructions.
4. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating
dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power
supply wiring to electrical equipment. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring
diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of
electrical equipment and controls. Clearly differentiate between portions of
wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
6. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each fire
protection equipment, control and accessory; including "trouble-shooting"
maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring
diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E. Coordination drawings
1. Drawings:
a. Provide coordination in determining adequate clearance and space
requirements for fire protection equipment, mechanical equipment,
electrical equipment, and other items/equipment in the project. The
Architect/Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of
equipment in the event of interference between pieces of equipment,
piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the trades. The
Architect/Engineer will only review conflicts and give an opinion but will
not perform as a coordinator.
b. Provide coordination drawings indicating structural components, reflected
ceiling layout, fire protection items, mechanical items, electrical items, and

174
other systems. Indicate on the coordination drawings where components
will be installed and how the service access area to such items shall be
maintained. Illustrate items requiring access for maintenance or
adjustment.
c. The Contractor will not be allowed any time extensions for participation in
the coordination drawing process. The Contractor will not be allowed any
contract cost extra for any additional fittings, rerouting or changes of duct
size to equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings that may be
determined necessary through the coordination drawing process.
d. Deviations from the contract documents that are necessary for overall
system installation and coordination shall be brought to the attention of
the Architect/Engineer. Such necessary changes in the contract scope
discovered through the coordination drawing process will be covered by
the requirements of the “change order” process.
e. Access panels shall occur only in gypsum wallboard or plaster ceilings
where indicated on the drawings or as needed to provide access to
equipment, dampers, or valves. Access to fire suppression and other items
shall be through accessible acoustical ceiling areas. Additional access
panels will not be allowed without written approval from the
Architect/Engineer at the coordination drawing stage and only after
alternatives are reviewed. Layout changes shall be made to avoid
additional access panels. If additional access panels are required, they
shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
f. Soffit penetrations and light alcoves shall be fully coordinated with hanging
devices, studs, fire/smoke ratings, and structural support requirements.
2. The Contractor and subcontractors responsible for items of work located in or
above ceilings shall participate in the coordination drawing process.
Participation is mandatory. If the Contractor or subcontractor fails to participate
in the coordination drawing process, the Owner reserves the right to do the
following:
a. Stop construction progress payments for work performed by the
Contractor. Payments will be reinstated only after the Contractor or
subcontractor resumes participation in the coordination drawing process.
b. Require the relocation and resizing of components as necessary to ensure
components will be installed as intended. In the event the Contractor did
not participate in the coordination process, the Contractor will not be
entitled to contract cost increases or time extensions due to Owner-
initiated changes in the work.
c. The Contractor shall be held responsible for unnecessary rework that is
attributable to failure to participate in the coordination process.
3. Drawings shall be prepared at 1/4 inch = 1 foot, 0 inches (minimum).
a. Coordination participants shall provide equipment installation and
clearance requirements. This information shall be indicated on the
coordination drawings.

175
b. Coordination drawings shall indicate the following major system
components (including insulation, hub or connection widths with
verification of turning radius):
1) Roof drain leaders
2) Large waste piping
3) Sprinkler mains
4) Equipment located above the ceiling
5) Heating hot water piping
6) Chilled water piping
7) Conduit runs 2 inches and larger
8) Cable tray
9) Bus duct
10) Recessed light fixtures
11) Building wiring or cable trays
12) Ceiling heights as shown in contract documents and thickness of
system
13) Soffits (including framing of supports)
14) Access points and clearances required
15) Access panels
16) Valves
17) Dampers
18) Coils
19) Ductwork
20) Fire-rated wall, partition, and floor penetrations
21) Steam and condensate piping
22) Space allotted for future utilities
23) Equipment in mechanical and electrical spaces
c. Information shall be delineated to indicate distances from column
centerlines, pipe/equipment size, and distance from finished floor to
bottom of pipe/equipment and hangers.
4. The coordination drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and
Owner’s representative for review. The submitted coordination drawings shall
indicate which contractors participated in the process and where conflicts
appear to occur even after the priority ranking of utility routing has been
utilized. In the event that conflicts require input from the Architect/Engineer,
recommended solutions will be provided with the coordination drawings for
review by the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer will review and return
an opinion to the contractors for implementation. All contractors shall agree to
the final coordinated layout by signing off on the coordination drawings before
any construction can begin.
5. Maintain an updated set of coordination drawings at the job site reflecting
changes, modifications and adjustments. Changes shall be reflected and sets or
new sheets reissued to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner for review on a
monthly basis with changes “clouded” and brought to the attention of the

176
Architect/Engineer and the Owner.
6. When a change order request is issued, the affected subcontractors shall review
the coordination drawings and bring to the attention of the Contractor and the
Architect/Engineer revisions necessary to the work of others not directly
affected by the change order.
7. Contractors that fail to cooperate in the coordination drawing effort shall be
responsible for all costs incurred for adjustments to the work made necessary to
accommodate installations. Provide adequate clearance and access through
accessible ceilings. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are
signed off will be the responsibility of the Contractor or subcontractor who did
not properly identify their work or installed the work improperly.
F. Provide separate shop drawing submittals for the following items:
Permits
Warranties
As-built documents
Pipe pressure test logs
Operation and maintenance manuals (electronic copies
integrated into EMCS)
Close-out / walk-through documentation
Training seminar documentation
Pressure gauges
1.
Pipe supports, anchors, sleeves, and hangers
Equipment curbs, supports, and hangers
Mechanical seals
Fire sealants
2.
Fire protection identification materials
Valve schedule
3.
Fire protection equipment and materials
Sprinklers
Standpipe hose connections and hose connection
cabinets
Fire protection piping and sprinkler location plan(s)
Hydraulic calculations
Hydrostatic test report(s)

177
54.7 SUBSTITUTES
A. All proposals shall be based on providing and installing the materials or items of
equipment which are hereinafter specified. The Contractor’s options in selecting
materials and equipment are limited by requirements of the Contract Documents and
governing regulations. They are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures
experienced by the Contractor on previous construction projects.
B. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities,
and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing. Associated fire protection and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit,
motors, bases, and equipment spaces are to be increased accordingly, but all
recommended manufacturer clearances, etc., are to be maintained within the allotted
fire protection spaces. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if
larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the
equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and
commissioning requirements.
C. Where the terms "or equivalent" is used, the Contractor may substitute alternate
equipment, materials, etc. subject to review by the Architect/Engineer and the Client
representative during the submittal phase of the project.
D. Where the term "or approved equivalent" is used, the Contractor may not substitute
E. Where the term "no equivalent" is used, the Contractor must provide the specified or
F. Final determination regarding substitutions shall be by the Architect/Engineer.
54.8 WARRANTY
A. Refer to the General Conditions section of this Specification for general warranty
subsequent Fire Protection Sections.
A. Operate each system and item of equipment in a test run of appropriate duration, but
B. Systems shall not be used for temporary operation during construction without
written approval from the Architect/Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. If

178
approved and used during construction, all systems must be properly maintained and
operated according to manufacturer recommendations. Immediately prior to
turnover to the Owner, the contractor shall perform all necessary preventative
maintenance according to all manufacturer recommendations.
C. Any system placed in temporary operation for testing during construction shall be
properly maintained and operated by the Contractor.
D. All systems shall be protected against freezing, flooding, corrosion or other forms of
E. Material or equipment damaged, shown to be defective or not in accordance with the
representative.
F. All tests shall be made after notification to and in the presence of the Owner’s
representative.
G. Before starting up any system, each piece of equipment comprising any part of the
H. After systems have been demonstrated to be satisfactory for 7 consecutive days and
I. Conduct a walk-through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel pertaining to
the continued operation and maintenance of fire protection equipment and systems.
attending and subjects covered. Walk through document(s) shall be signed and dated
by the contractor's representative and the owner's representative.
1. Provide instruction seminar, minimum 6 hours each (approximately 3 hours
classroom training and 3 hours hands-on training), for each of the following
items:
a. Fire Pump (if applicable)
2. Training sessions shall be recorded by video camera by the contractor and the
recording shall be turned over to the owner in DVD format.
J. At the time of substantial project completion, turn over the prime responsibility for
operation of the fire protection equipment and systems to the Owner's operating
personnel. Until the time of final acceptance, provide full time operating personnel,

179
who are completely familiar with the work, to consult with and continue training the
Owner's personnel.
1. If any systems are operated prior to substantial completion, the contractor shall
perform all necessary preventative maintenance according to all manufacturer
recommendations.
54.10 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS
A. Prepare as-built documents in accordance with the requirements in mechanical
divsion Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in
above, indicate the following installed conditions:
1. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall provide the Owner with as-built drawings
for pipe mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior;
locations of control valves and supervisory switches; drain valves; and indicate all
devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair.
2. All fire protection systems as described in the Specifications and/or shown on
the drawings.
3. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located
and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance
located. Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Refer to
mechanical "Fire Protection Identification." Indicate actual inverts and horizontal
locations of underground piping.
4. Equipment/material locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from
prominent building lines.
5. All items must be dimensioned in horizontal and vertical plans to allow
Architect/Engineer to update Building Information Model (BIM) file for Owner.

180
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE HYDRANT WET SYSTEM
GENERAL
This document shall be read in conjunction with all relevant commercial
documents. In case of contradiction between technical specification and other
documents, data in technical specifications shall prevail.
1.0 All work under this contract shall be carried out in accordance with the Technical
Specification and the latest revisions of NEFPA Standards, Codes, IEE Electricity
Rules and also Regulations and Norms of Fire Services.
SCOPE OF WORK
1.1 Preparation of firefighting scheme drawings and submission to client
obtaining approval prior to work execution
1.2 Supply and design data assistance, fabrication, erection, painting, testing
and commissioning of the Fire Hydrant System with mechanical and
electrical equipment, instrumentation, pipes, valves, fittings, supports,
cables etc complete in all respects, and preparation & submission of
drawings/calculations/other documents to concerned authorities &
obtaining interim & final Approval/Sanction/NOC (No Objection
Certificates) local authority before and after completion of work as
required.
TECHNICAL PARAMETERS
Brief Description of Fire Hydrant System
Full Scheme (For general information of the tenderer)
1 Nos. Fire Pump Hydrant 1 Nos. jocky pump ( each electric motor driven)
and 1 (one) no. Diesel Engine driven Fire Pump shall be installed in the
pump room, pumping water from the underground water tank. The
common outlets of fire pump delivery system shall cater to the following
: i) Internal fire hydrants in each floor and on roof.
ii) External Fire Hydrants.
iii) First Aid Hose Reels in each floor.

181
At the top of each Wet Riser an Air Vessel assembly with Air Relief Valve, a
Drain-valve, pressure gauge etc shall be provided to take care of pressure
surges and also for letting out entrapped air in the system.
Operation
Fire Hydrant System & Sprinkler System
Water supply header and main pipe up to hydrant valve/landing valves shall
be kept pressurized by the jockey pump which shall start automatically on
receiving the impulse from the pressure switch in case of any pressure drop
in the header.
It shall stop at a preset pressure as soon as pressure builds up in the
header.
For smaller fires, first aid hose reel would be used; while hydrant valve
would be used for bigger fires.
In the event of fire outbreak, opening of hydrant valve/hose reel will result
in fall of pressure in the header and electric motor driven fire pump shall
come into operation automatically through the impulse from the pressure
switch. The fire pump shall be stopped manually only.
In case the electric driven main fire pump fails to start; the diesel engine
driven pump shall come into action automatically on further fall of pressure
and receiving impulse from pressure switch.
The setting of the pressure switches shall be done keeping the above
sequence in consideration.
SPECIFICATION (TECHNOLOGICAL)
Pumps
a) Motor driven fire pumps
End suction type, horizontally mounted centrifugal pump (as per IS 1520), TAC
approved each capable to deliver 150 cum/hour (2500 lpm) of clear water at minimum
70 M TDH, coupled to a suitably electric motor mounted on a common base frame and
antivibration pads coupling, coupling guard and fixing bolts etc. Motor HP to be
suitably selected to suit minimum discharge and residual head at the top most

182
hydrant. The characteristic curve should have a large range of discharge points for
different heads
Diesel Engine driven Fire Pump
, End suction type horizontally mounted centrifugal pump (as per IS 1520), to
deliver 150 cum/hour of clear water at minimum 70 M TDH, coupled to a diesel
engine, continuously rated of suitable horse power, direct injection, four stroke,
water cooled type complete with coupling, coupling guard common base frame,
ant vibration pads, instrument panel with RPM indicator, pressure gauge, radiator
with engine cooling system, fuel tank, tool kit, air filtration unit, exhaust piping
with silencer, engine shutdown mechanism, starting mechanism, for both
automatic & manual mode, Exide heavy duty batteries with charging system etc.
The engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor to control the engine
speed within 10% of its rated speed under any condition of load up to the full load
rating
. Note :
a) Above pumps shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150% of rated
discharge capacity at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head. The shut-off
head shall not exceed 120% of rated head.
b) Diesel engine/motor
shall be of continuous rating type and its rating shall be at equivalent to the
maximum horse power required as per curve requirement.
c) The pump sets with cushy foots shall have to be installed on RCC floor already
constructed and cost of the required civil works viz chipping of floor & concrete
base etc (as required), shall be included in the quoted price of respective pump
sets.
C I Sluice Valve
C I components of the sluice valve shall be of Grey cast iron conforming to IS 210.
The valves shall be flanged having solid wedge gate valve, inside screw, hand wheel
with open-close indications etc all conforming to IS 780 but of nominal pressure
rating of PN 1.6 as per TAC norms. Test Pressure at manufacturers works Flange
drillings shall normally be as per IS 1538. However, if the manufacturer drills the
flanges to other standard specifications, the valves shall be supplied with a pair of
matching flanges, nuts, bolts, washers, rubber insertion etc and such flanges shall
have inside threads to suit pipes of same nominal size as that of the valve. The
quoted price of the valves shall also include cost of arrangement for securing the

183
valves in `open' or `closed' positions by padlock/rivetted strap, where required per
TAC norms.
G M Valves
Gun metal components of the peets valves i.e. Gate Valves, Check Valves i.e. no
return valves, and Globe valves etc shall be of Gun Metal conforming to Grade 2 of
IS 318. The valves shall be having flanged or screwed ends, hand wheel with open-
close indications etc all conforming to Class-2 Valves of IS 778 (ISI marked) or
imported as per ASTM.
C I non return valves C I reflux valves, i.e. swing check type non-return valves, shall
be conforming to IS 5312. Test pressures shall be same as per CI sluice valves.
M S Pipes and Fittings
All M S pipes shall be as per IS 1239 (heavy/medium quality as mentioned in the
schedule of items upto 150 mm N B, as per IS 3589 (minimum 6 mm thick) above
150 mm N B, and the fittings shall be of all welded construction, butt weld type
flanges shall conform to IS 6392 and gaskets of synthetic molded rubber approved
by Fire Standard. All pipes outside the building shall be laid underground at a depth
of 1 mtr (approx) and laying shall be as per layout drawing, excavation, back filling
of earth, cutting holes in existing structure where necessary, providing puddle
collars/pipes as required & making good the damages including making the
concerned portion of the structure water tight.
Erection of over ground piping shall be complete with necessary pipe supports
hangers with MS angles/plate/nut bolts/clamps etc with fabrication as required
including
a) Pressure Gauges
Pressure gauges with controlling cocks etc shall be of approved make having
pressure range, bourdon material and dial size as specified in schedule of items.
b) Pressure Switches
Pressure switches with accessories shall be of approved make and design and shall
actuate (`cut-off' and/or `make contact' as required) at pre-set pressures.
Landing Valves (Hydrant Valve)
Gun metal landing valve (internal/external Fire-Hydrants) with oblique type single
outlet as per schedule of quantities complete with hose coupling adaptor of 63 mm
size, instantaneous spring lock arrangement and blank cap with chain conforming
to IS 5290. External Fire-Hydrants to be provided with stand posts as specified in

184
schedule of quantities. Orifice plates may be provided where inlet pressure is
required to be reduced as per WBFS requirement.
Branch Pipe
Gun metal, short type, instantaneous pattern branch pipe to suit fire hose delivery
coupling of 63 mm size complete with G M nozzle of 20 mm nominal size
conforming to IS 903. 5.10 Hose with Coupling 63 mm nominal internal dia hose,
rubber lined wooven-jacketted coupling with Type-II (Reinforced Rubber lined
type) of IS 636, firefighting delivery hose 15 M long each, fitted with gun metal
coupling of 63 mm size with multi serrated tail and double instantaneous spring
lock arrangement comprising of male half at one end and female half at other end
complete with rubber cup washer and conforming to IS 903.
Hose with Coupling
63 mm nominal internal dia hose, rubber lined wooven-jacketted coupling with
Type-II (Reinforced Rubber lined type) of IS 636, fire fighting delivery hose 15 M
long each, fitted with gun metal coupling of 63 mm size with multi serrated tail and
double instantaneous spring lock arrangement comprising of male half at one end
and female half at other end complete with rubber cup washer and conforming to
IS 903.
Hose Reel Swinging
hose reel conforming to IS 884 & comprising of 3 ply rubber hose of length
specified in schedule of items, 20 mm (3/4") nominal bore (25 kg/cm2 /350 psi
bursting pressure), mild steel pressed reel with 170 degree swinging, nozzle of G M
chromium plated, with non-jamming controlling handle which shall stay at the ÒN'
ÒFF' position as set, wall brackets with Ù' shaped reel carrier made of C I
complete with 25 mm NB G M valve at the inlet, and orifice plates (if necessary for
reducing pressure).
Air Vessel Mild steel
air vessel adequate size to take care of pressure surges during operation of the
system and venting of entrapped air in the system shall be complete with air relief
valve, pressure gauge, drain valve and shutt off valve at the inlet.
Valve Chamber Valve

185
chamber of adequate size to accommodate external valves shall be constructed as
directed per site condition.
Fire-Brigade Connections
Fire-Brigade connections (inlets) to Riser and Under Ground Reservoir shall be
with two numbers of 63 mm instantaneous inlets for each connection as per TAC
norms. Other aspects of the connection shall be as per IS 904.
Painting
All external steel surface shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove rust, scale etc
before applying the primer.
a) All underground piping shall be provided protective wrappings as per TAC
norms.
b) All over ground piping/hose boxes/landing valves/hose reel, M S frames etc shall
be painted with two (2) coats of RED LEAD primer or equivalent followed by two
coats of Post Office Red coloured Synthetic enamel finish paint.
c) All other equipment shall be given a red oxide/zinc chromate primer and two (2)
coats of synthetic enamel.
SPECIFICATION (ELECTRICS)
Controls
i) Electric Motor driven fire & jocky pumps & diesel engine driven fire pump shall
start automatically through preset pressure switches in proper sequence as
elucidated in Cl.
ii) Stopping of all fire pumps shall be manual only.
iii) Audio visual alarm shall be sounded when fire pumps start/starts.
iv) Power supply 'ON' indication shall be provided in the Fire Pump Control Panel.
A C Motors
All A C motors shall be approved type & totally enclosed fan cooled and shall have
Class B insulation with degree of protection IP 55 conforming to IS 325 and frame.
All motors shall be suitable for both DOL and STAR/DELTA starting, as required. The
motor terminal box shall be suitable for receiving aluminium cables and suitable
for positioning on the motor body at intervals 90 degree as required for the

186
particular application. The motors shall have also two distinct terminals for
earthing. All the motors shall be suitable for 415 V (- 15% to + 5% variation) 3
phase 50 HZ plus minus 3% AC supply.
Motor Control Centre (M C C)
The M C C shall be made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 2 mm, totally
enclosed, self supporting, floor mounted dust and vermin proof cubicle type
construction with multitier compartmental arrangement with degree of protection
IP 54. It shall have a series of panels of uniform height placed side by side with
front access for operation as well as cabling. MCC panel shall be completely front
wired type having all device/termination etc, approachable from front without any
requirement of back access for maintenance repairs and cabling. Provision of cable
entry shall be from the top or bottom to match with cable layout of the pump
room. Main fire pump motors shall have star/delta or DOL starting as per TAC
requirement. The motor control circuit shall be provided with test facilities so that
it is possible to test the control circuit with the main motor circuit disconnected.
Control voltage shall be 240 V, A C single phase derived from an isolating
transformer. The main busbar of the M C C shall be of electrical grade copper and
shall have continuous current rating as required but in no case less than the
current rating of incoming switch fuse unit. The busbars shall be easily accessible
from the front of the cubicle and shall be colour coded as per IS for phase
identification. An copper earth busbar of adequate cross sectional area shall be
provided in the bottom or top part of the cubicle and shall run for the entire length
of the MCC. Start/stop push button, auto/manual selector switch and indication
shall be provided and the MCC for control of the motors. Incomer cubicle shall
incorporate voltmeter, ammeter with respective selector switches, power factor
meter and phase indication lamps. Each outgoing cubicles shall have ammeter with
selector switch and on/off, trip indication lamps. Ammeters for incoming/outgoing
cubicles, for motors it shall be supressed scale type beyond full load rating upto 8
times of full load current for taking care of starting current kicks.
Diesel Engine Control Panel
The control panel shall be made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 2 mm,
totally enclosed, self-suporting, floor mounted, dust and vermin proof cubicle type
with degree of protection IP 54. The following features shall be incorporated in the
control panel
Contactors,
relays, timers etc for applying automatic starting pulses to the diesel engine on
receipt of a command signal from the pressure switch with starting sequence
consisting of three electrical pulses of 5 second duration each spaced at 5 second
apart.

187
ii) Main ON/OFF isolator with DC circuit fuses and main ON indication
iii) Boost cum trickle automatic battery charger with fuse protection for AC
charging circuit (trickle/boost), Auto/Manual selector switch for charging, charging
current meter, volt meter etc.
iv) Indication/Alarm for the pump "RUN" condition, Annunication for engine fault
condition, alarm cut off switch and reset switch for fault conditions
v) Engine start switch, engine stop switch together with Auto/Manual switch for
engine starting and indication showing failure to start on 'AUTO'.
vi) Engine RPM indication from in built tachometer with engine.
Cables All power cables shall be multi core, 1100 V grade, PVC insulated, PVC
sheathed, aluminium conductor cables manufactured and tested as per IS 1554
and ISI marked. All control cables shall be multi core, 1100 V grade, PVC insulated
and overall PVC sheathed with copper conductor manufactured and tested as per
relevant IS and ISI marked. Armoured power and control cables shall be only
considered. Installation accessories and earthing materials One lot of installation
accessories and earthing material shall be installed for equipment and cables and
earthing of equipment.
Power supply For M C C one 415 V, A C 3 phase and neutral 50 HZ feeder of
adequate capacity shall be made available at the M C C incomer. If the equipment
is required to operate at any other voltage, necessary transformers & converters
shall be included in the scope of the tenderer.
Cables
All power cables shall be multi core, 1100 V grade, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed,
aluminium conductor cables manufactured and tested as per IS 1554 and ISI
marked. All control cables shall be multi core, 1100 V grade, PVC insulated and
overall PVC sheathed with copper conductor manufactured and tested as per
relevant IS and ISI marked. Armoured power and control cables shall be only
considered.
Installation accessories and earthing materials
One lot of installation accessories and earthing material shall be installed for
equipment and cables and earthing of equipment.

188
Power supply
For M C C one 415 V, A C 3 phase and neutral 50 HZ feeder of adequate capacity
shall be made available at the M C C incomer.
If the equipment is required to operate at any other voltage, necessary
transformers & converters shall be included in the scope of the tenderer
LIST OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
The contractor shall use materials in their works subject to inspection prior to
despatch, by Owner or his authorised representative of any materials, as deemed
necessary in accordance with the following list. All materials not otherwise
specified shall be in accordance with the latest fire fighting Standard Specification,
where such exists and prior approval of Owner/Architect. The contractor shall be
bound to offer sample of materials, which are claimed to be conforming to IS
Specifications, for testing at an approved Test Laboratory. Contractor shall
purchase all materials from the makers or their authorized stockists only.
Necessary documentary evidences must be produced to the Owner or their
authorised representative on demand. Contractor shall be bound to supply items
of any make of the items as per the choice of the Owner without any extra price
ELECTRICAL REQUIRMENT FOR FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
55. GENERAL
55.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Mechanical Division Specification sections, apply to
work of this section.
B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field
installation and electrical connections are specified in mechanical division .
55.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an
integral part of packaged fire protection equipment. These components include, but
are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches furnished
as an integral part of packaged fire protection equipment. In addition, this section
covers necessary coordination issues between fire protection and electrical

189
disciplines. All fire protection and electrical construction documents must be
completely reviewed by the Fire Protection and Electrical Contractors prior to the
submission of bids. Any discrepancies in the documents should be brought to the
Architect/Engineer's attention at that time. Failure to properly coordinate or review
documents in advance of submission of bids will not be valid cause for changes to the
overall Contract amount.
B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for fire
protection equipment are scheduled on the Drawings.
55.3 REFERENCES
A. The design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all equipment and
materials furnished under the requirements of this specification section shall conform
to the following:
1. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
2. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
3. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches.
4. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
55.4 SUBMITTALS
A. No separate submittal is required. Submit product data for motors, starters, and
other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which
it serves, or as required by the individual equipment specification sections.
A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled and listed.
56. PRODUCTS
56.1 MOTORS
A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special
motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual
equipment specifications.
1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven
loads.
2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the
motor to operate in the service factor range. Minimum service factors shall be as
follows:
Motor Service Factor Schedule
Horsepower: 3600 RPM: 1800 RPM:

190
1/6 – 1/3 1.35 1.35
1/2 1.25 1.25
3/4 1.25 1.25
1 – 1.25 1.25 1.15
1.5 - 150 1.15 1.15

191
3. Two-speed poly-phase motors shall have two separate windings served by a
single point electrical connection to the two speed starter. Two speed starters
shall be located at the motor location unless otherwise noted.
4. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 deg. C environment with maximum 50 deg. C
temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).
5. Starting capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system,
and not less than five (5) evenly timed starts per hour for manually controlled
motors.
6. Motor construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty,
Design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.
a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; use driven equipment
manufacturer's standards to suit each specific application.
b. Bearings: Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals;
regreasable; designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other
drives produce lateral or axial thrust in motor; for fractional horsepower,
light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are permitted.
c. Enclosure Type: Unless otherwise indicated, open drip-proof motors for
indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during
operation; guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by
employees or building occupants; weather protected Type I for outdoor
use, Type II where not housed.
d. Overload protection: Built-in thermal overload protection (in accordance
with NEC requirements) and, where indicated, an internal sensing device
suitable for signaling and stopping the motor at the starter.
7. Noise rating: "Quiet"
8. Efficiency: "Premium efficiency" motors, as defined in NEMA MG 1, most recent
edition.
9. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings,
characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.
10. Motors Used With Variable Frequency Drives: Ratings, characteristics, and
features coordinated with and approved by drive manufacturer. Motor shall be
designed and labeled for use with variable frequency drives. Motor shall be
designed with critical vibration frequencies outside the operating range of the
drive output and shall be suitable for use throughout speed range without
overheating.
a. Provide shaft grounding ring/system to divert adverse shaft currents away
from the motor bearings.
56.2 SHEAVES
A. All sheaves shall conform to NEMA Standard MG1-14.42, which lists minimum
diameters and maximum overhangs. Locate motors to minimize overhang.
B. When replacing sheaves, use sheaves of at least the originally supplied sizes.

192
C. Contractor shall be responsible for replacement sheaves required to achieve specified
performance. Coordinate with testing and balancing of the equipment.
56.3 STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND WIRING
A. Motor-Starter Characteristics: Motor starters shall be compatible with the
equipment they serve. In general, motor starter characteristics shall meet the
requirements of Mechanical Division specification sections
B. MOTOR CONNECTIONS
1. Provide connections to motors in accordance with the requirements listed in the
electrical specifications.
2. See MECHANICAL Division for the use of lugs for motor connections.
56.4 SAFETY SWITCHES
A. Furnish and install heavy duty type safety switches, having the electrical
characteristics, ratings and modifications shown on the drawings. All switches shall
have:
1. NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless otherwise noted for all interior
applications.
2. NEMA 3R rainproof enclosures unless otherwise noted for all exterior
applications.
3. Metal nameplates, front cover mounted that contain a permanent record of
switch type, catalog number and H.P. ratings with both standard and time delay
fuses.
4. Handle that is padlockable in "OFF" position.
5. Non-teasible, positive quick-make, quick-break mechanism.
6. UL approval and shall bear the UL label.
7. All fusible switches shall have Class R Fuse rejection clips.
56.5 MECHANICAL DIVISION RESPONSIBILITY
A. Unless otherwise noted, furnish and install single phase starters with thermal
overload protection for all single phase motors not indicated as part of the
Mechanical Division responsibility. Furnish and install all full voltage, non-reversing,
single speed motor starters for appropriate three phase equipment. Furnish and
install disconnect switches for all three phase motors. Provide the following
additional equipment as required.
B. Provide auxiliary motor starter contacts as shown on the drawings or as required for
proper control of equipment.
C. Furnish and install all motor power circuit conduit and wiring.
D. Install power factor correction capacitors furnished by the Mechanical Division

193
Contractor.
E. Furnish and install all junction boxes.
56.6 Mechanical DIVISION-RESPONSIBILITY
A. Furnish and set all motors.
B. Furnish and install all electrical control circuit conduits and wiring and control devices
required to perform the equipment control functions as specified in Mechanical
Division.
C. All electrical equipment provided, including the wiring and installation of electrical
equipment shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of this Section and
Division-26.
57. EXECUTION
57.1 INSTALLATION
A. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact.
Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not
acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided
with the equipment supplied.
B. For flexible coupled drive motors, mount coupling to the shafts in accordance with the
coupling manufacturer’s recommendations. Align shafts to manufacturer’s
requirements or within 0.002 inch per inch diameter of coupling hub.
C. For belt drive motors, mount sheaves on the appropriate shafts per manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a straight edge to check alignment of the sheaves. Reposition
sheaves as necessary so the straight edge contacts both sheave faces squarely. After
sheaves are aligned, loosen the adjustable motor base so the belt(s) can be added,
and tighten the base so the belt tension is in accordance with the drive
manufacturer’s recommendations. Frequently check belt tension and adjust if
necessary during the first day of operation and again after 80 hours of operation.
57.2 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION
A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, all equipment, controls, etc. shall be
furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with this specification section and the
following schedule. Attached notes shall apply to schedule.
ITEM:
FURNISHED
BY:
SET
BY:
POWER
WIRING
BY:
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
WIRING BY:

194
SCHEDULE KEY: FPC = Fire Protection Contractor
EC = Electrical Contractor
Fire protection solenoid
valves, supervisory
switches, etc.
FPC FPC EC --

195
57.3 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Mechanical Division Section
"PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in mechanical
division include the following information for equipment items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,
performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature
and commercial numbers of replacement parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and
routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping,
shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating
instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting
instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
58. PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE).
59. EXECUTION
59.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types,
grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.
B. Store and handle material and equipment in compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or
low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
C. Use proper lifting equipment where size/weight requires handling by such means.
D. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and moving instructions for loading material and
equipment, and moving them to final location.
E. Equipment requiring disassembly for access purposes shall be disassembled and
reassembled as required for movement into the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Deliver material and equipment as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable
by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.
G. Fire Protection Contractor shall schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time
requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.
H. Any material that is damaged during delivery, storage, handling, or installation shall

196
be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for review of its acceptability in
the project.
1. The Architect/Engineer shall be the sole and final judge as to the suitability of
damaged items.
59.2 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the
requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Mechanical Divisions through for rough-in
requirements.
59.3 COORDINATION
A. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of fire protection materials and
equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large
equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
B. Coordinate the fire protection work with work of the different trades so that:
1. Interferences between fire protection, mechanical, electrical, architectural, and
structural work, including existing services, will be avoided.
2. Within the limits indicated on the drawings, the maximum practicable space for
operation, maintenance repair, removal and testing of fire protection and other
equipment will be provided.
3. All Contractors shall establish utility elevations prior to fabrication and shall
coordinate their material and equipment with other trades. When a conflict
arises, priority is as follows:
a. Light fixtures.
b. Gravity flow piping, including steam and condensate.
c. Equipment requiring access, including terminal units, fire/smoke dampers,
and piping valves.
d. Ductwork.
e. Electrical busduct.
f. Electrical cable trays, including access space.
g. Piping (hydronic and plumbing).
h. Sprinkler/standpipe piping.
i. Electrical conduits and wireway.
4. Pipes, ducts, and similar items, shall be kept as close as possible to ceiling, walls,
and columns, to take up a minimum amount of space. Pipes, ducts, and similar
items shall be located so that they will not interfere with the intended use of
other equipment.
C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in
poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

197
D. Furnish and install, without additional expense to the Owner, all offsets, fittings and
similar items necessary in order to accomplish the requirements of coordination.
59.4 FIRE PROTECTION INSTALLATIONS
A. All dimensions and clearances affecting the installation of work shall be verified in the
field in relation to established datum, to building openings and to the work of other
trades.
B. The location of all equipment and systems shall be coordinated to preclude
interferences with other construction.
C. Should interferences occur which will necessitate deviations from layout or
dimensions shown on the Drawings, the Architect/Engineer and the Owner’s
representative shall be notified and any changes approved before proceeding with
the work.
D. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress
of construction to allow for fire protection installations.
E. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials,
and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
F. Coordinate connection of fire protection systems with exterior underground and
overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations,
franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection
for each service.
G. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,
including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to
arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the
Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements
conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect/Engineer.
H. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular
to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished
spaces.
I. Install fire protection equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for
ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend
grease fittings to an accessible location.
J. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems
required to be installed at a specified slope.

198
K. Welding, sweating, or brazing operations
1. All cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating operations carried on in the vicinity of,
or accessible to, combustible material shall be adequately protected to make
certain that a spark or hot slag does not reach the combustible material and start
a fire.
2. When it is necessary to do cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating close to wood
construction, in pipe shafts, or other locations where combustible materials
cannot be removed or adequately protected, employ fireproof blankets and
proper fire extinguishers. Position another individual nearby to guard against
sparks and fire.
3. Whenever combustible material has been exposed to molten metal or hot slag
from welding or cutting operations, or spatter from electric arc operations, a
guard shall be kept at the place of work for at least one hour after completion to
verify that smoldering fires have not been started.
4. Whenever welding or cutting operations are carried on in a vertical shaft or
where floor openings exist, a fire guard shall be employed to examine all floors
below the point of the welding or cutting operation. The fire guard shall be kept
on duty for at least one hour after completion to verify that smoldering fires
have not been started.
5. Before any work involving cutting, welding, brazing, or sweating operations is
started, consult with the Architect/Engineer as to particular safety precautions to
be employed on the work.
59.5 ACCESSIBILITY
A. All work shall be installed so as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair
with particular attention given to locating valves, controls and equipment requiring
periodic lubrication, cleaning, adjusting or servicing of any kind.
59.6 LUBRICATION AND TOOLS
A. Provide for each piece of equipment any special tools and a list of such tools required
for the operation or adjustment of the equipment and turn over to the Owner’s
representative prior to final acceptance of the equipment.
59.7 START-UP
A. PIPING SYSTEMS PRESSURE TESTING
1. The following personnel in the order listed shall be considered acceptable
witnesses of all piping pressure testing:
a. Local Authority Having Jurisdiction
b. UNL FPC Engineering Representative
c. Mechanical Engineer / Architect
d. General Contractor’s Foreman
2. Removal of pressure charge and associated drain down shall also be witnessed.

199
3. Fire protection contractor shall provide a minimum of 24-hour notice to at least
one of the above listed parties before commencing any piping systems pressure
test.
4. Pressure gauge requirements: Provide recently calibrated gauge with 4” face and
a range such that test pressure is between 50% and 100% of gauge range. For
example, a gauge with a 15 psig range is acceptable for a 10 psig pressure test,
whereas a gauge with a 30 psig range is unacceptable in this application. Gauge
resolution shall be suitable for type of testing, system size and test media.
Gauge shall have been recently calibrated.
5. All piping pressurizing equipment (i.e., air compressor) shall be disconnected
before test is commenced and shall remain disconnected for the entire duration
of the test.
6. Entire system shall be properly vented before test is commenced.
7. For specific piping pressure testing requirements and procedures, see applicable
piping systems specification sections. At minimum, however, pipe systems
should be tested at the following pressures and all installed components must be
rated at this pressure at the actual operating temperature:
a. Sprinkler and/or standpipe piping 200 psig
8. Submit completed pipe pressure test log for each pressure test before final
project closeout. Test log shall also be included in operation and maintenance
manuals.
NOTE: USE MULTIPLE FORMS IF NECESSARY

200
59.8 GENERAL CONTRACTOR - FIRE PROTECTION EXTENT OF WORK
A. Access Panels
1. Furnish and install panels for access to all valves and flow switches and similar
items where no other means of access, such as readily removable, sectional
ceiling is shown or specified.
2. The plans indicate the location of all anticipated access panels. The Division
Contractor shall make every effort to locate all material and equipment requiring
service and maintenance above accessible ceilings or utilize the indicated access
panels. Material and equipment requiring service and maintenance that is
shown above inaccessible ceilings shall be relocated to accessible or exposed
areas whenever possible. When these items are located in exposed areas, the
Division Contractor is to verify with the Architect/Engineer that the installation
will not affect the aesthetics of the building. However, when it is not possible to
locate these items in accessible or exposed areas due to the configuration of the
actual installation of the fire protection and other trade systems or aesthetic
reasons, additional access panels shall be provided. The contractor shall be
equitably compensated for the additional access panels.
3. Refer to Section for Access Doors and Panels for specific information on type and
size of panels
B. Cutting and Patching
1. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section
"CUTTING AND PATCHING." In addition to the requirements specified in Division
1, the following requirements apply:
2. The Division Contractor shall coordinate all cutting and patching of holes, in
existing building and new construction which are required for the passage of fire
protection work.
3. Division Contractor is to notify the General Contractor prior to submitting his bid,
the number, size and location of all cutting and patching requirements. The
Division Contractor shall be liable for all associated costs of cutting and patching
for fire protection work upon failure to notify the General Contractor prior to bid
submission.
4. Under no circumstances shall any structural members, load-bearing walls or
footings be cut without first obtaining written permission from the Engineer.
5. Cut, channel, chase and core drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other
surfaces necessary for fire protection installations. Perform cutting by skilled
mechanics of the trades involved.
6. Patching of concrete openings shall be filled with grout and finished smooth with
the adjacent surface.
7. All below-grade openings for pipe shall be sealed with interlocking synthetic
rubber line assembly, Link-Seal by approved or equal.
8. All penetrations through the walls, floor, or structure of laboratory spaces,
laboratory support spaces, corridors or other areas in which relative

201
pressurization relationships are important shall be sealed airtight. Refer to the
drawings for additional information regarding rooms in which maintaining
pressurization is important.
9. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
10. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of fire protection equipment and materials
required to:
a. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
b. Remove and replace defective work.
c. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing.
e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
f. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to
provide for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work.
C. Excavation and Backfilling
1. Mechanical Division Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfilling
necessary to install the required fire protection work. Coordinate the work with
other excavating and backfilling work in the same area.
2. Except as indicated otherwise, comply with the applicable sections in Mechanical
Division of these specifications, excavation filling and backfilling (for structures)
to 5' outside the building line, and exterior utilities sections for beyond 5' from
the building line.
3. Trenching: Trench width shall be no more than required for shoring, bracing and
performance of the work. All necessary shoring and bracing shall be installed to
insure worker safety, proper installation of fire protection work, and protection
of adjacent structures. Provide all dewatering as required. Depth shall not
exceed that required to achieve the specified depth of cover and overdig will be
permitted for bedding material only. All trenches shall be open cut from the
surface.
4. Bedding: All work shall be properly bedded whether on virgin soil or on granular
bedding as specified. All granular bedding shall be laid on undisturbed soil. PVC
and copper piping shall have a 4" crushed stone bed conforming to specification
for granular material in Division 2. If rock is encountered, excavate to a point 4"
below installed bottom elevation of piping and provide bedding as called for
above.
5. Haunching: Haunching shall be brought up on both sides of the pipe for a
distance of 1/3 the pipe diameter and shall be of the same material used for
bedding.
6. Backfill: Backfilling shall not begin until installation has been tested for leaks.
7. Final Backfill shall be as follows:
a. Outside Building Under Paved Areas: Granular material specified in
Division 2.
b. Outside Building and Not Under Paved Areas: Clean soil free of vegetable

202
matter and foreign material or crushed limestone. In planted areas backfill
to a point 6" below finished grade. Owner will provide topsoil to finished
grade.
8. Placement: Place all granular material in lifts of 12" maximum compacted to
100% of maximum dry density as determined as ASTM D698. Place soil in 6" lifts
compacted to 95% of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. Do not
place any backfill until excavations have been cleaned of all water, debris and
loose or soft soil.
9. Protection: At least 72 hours prior to excavating, for each phase, Contractor
shall contact the Owner's Representative to arrange for utility locates in the
construction area.
10. Contractor shall provide temporary supports for all underground utilities
crossing an excavation.
11. Provide all required barricades, fencing, signs, lights, etc. as necessary for the
protection of the workers and of the general public.
12. Excess Material: All excess earth and other material resulting from the
excavation shall be removed from site daily by the Contractor.
13. Landscape work, pavement, flooring and similar exposed finish work that is
disturbed or damaged by excavation shall be repaired and restored to their
original condition by the Fire Protection Contractor.
D. Concrete Bases
1. Minimum 4" high concrete housekeeping pads shall be provided under all floor-
mounted fire suppression equipment, regardless of whether explicitly shown on
the Drawings. Concrete inertia pads with spring isolators shall be provided for all
base-mounted pumps and air compressors installed on any floors which are not
slab-on-grade. Inertia pads and isolators shall be sized by the equipment
manufacturer if specific information is not provided in the Contract Documents.
2. Division Contractor is to notify the General Contractor prior to submitting his bid,
the number, size and location of all fire protection equipment bases. The
Division Contractor shall be liable for all associated costs to install the fire
protection equipment bases upon failure to notify the General Contractor prior
to bid submission.
3. Construct concrete equipment bases a minimum 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's
setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000 psi, 28-day
compressive strength concrete, reinforcement and forms as specified in Division
3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete." Coordinate final equipment base size with
General Contractor.
4. All equipment shall be mechanically fastened to concrete bases.
E. Roof curbs, roof support for fire protection equipment and roof penetrations.
1. Verify, prior to submitting bid, the number, size, and location of all roof curb and
roof supports and the location of all roof penetrations. Provide all roof deck-

203
mounted equipment, pipe supports, and pipe penetrations. Cut roof deck for
pipe and duct penetrations, ess noted otherwise. Provide all roof
covering/membrane mounted equipment and pipe supports and roof drains, ess
noted otherwise.
2. Contractor shall be liable for all associated costs to install the roof curbs, roof
supports and roof penetrations not shown on the roof plan or added after the
roof system has been installed. Coordinate with the General Contractor prior to
construction the number size and location of all roof penetrations.
3. All roof curbs, supports, and rails shall be sized to keep equipment a minimum of
24” above the roof insulation membrane in order to limit snow accumulation at
or near equipment.
F. Painting
1. The General Contractor is to field paint fire protection equipment and materials
in specified areas as noted on the fire protection plans, fire protection schedules
and in the specifications. Mechanical Division Contractor is to coordinate the
painting of these items with the General Contractor. The Fire Protection
Contractor is to provide materials in these areas that are suitable for accepting
paint. The clean and preparation of the materials to reach paint is the
responsibility of the General Contractor ess noted specifically to be responsibility
of the Mechanical Division Contractor.
2. In concealed locations, field-fabricated bare iron or steel items required for
and shall be painted with one coat of zinc rich paint.
3. In exposed locations, field-fabricated bare iron or steel items required for
and shall be painted in accordance with Sepecfication.
59.9 ELECTRICAL-FIRE PROTECTION EXTENT OF WORK
A. The responsibility of work specified under Mechanical Division clarified under
Secpecfication "Electrical Requirements for Fire Protection Equipment.
Mechanicaldivision Contractor is to coordinate all electrical requirements prior to
ordering powered fire protection equipment.

204
FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM
(wet pipe sprinkler system & wetpipe stand system)
60. GENERAL
A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for a combined automatic wet-pipe sprinkler
system and wet-pipe standpipe system.
B. System design, installation, and certification.
C. Fire department connections.
D. Post indicator valves.
E. Water main connections.
A. REFERENCES
1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
2. NFPA 14 – Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
3. NFPA 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances
B. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from drawings.
Indicate drain and test locations.
C. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
D. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in
place until installation.
A. System to provide coverage for entire building.
B. System shall be a combined automatic sprinkler and wet-pipe standpipe system
conforming to NFPA 14 Class I systems. Wet pipe sprinkler system conforming to
NFPA 13 Light Hazard, Ordinary Hazard – Group 1, and Ordinary Hazard – Group 2
occupancy requirements. See drawings for zoning requirements and additional
information.

205
C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data.
Obtain water flow test data from Owner’s Representative. See drawings for further
information.
D. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. Fire alarm specialties
related to the sprinkler system (i.e. flow switches, supervisory valves, etc.) shall be
provided and installed by the sprinkler contractor. However, these devices shall be
wired under Mechanical Division .
E. Provide fire department connections as indicated. Coordinate fire department
connection type with local fire department.
F. Although not specifically specified, the Contractor shall provide and install all
supplementary and/or miscellaneous items and devices as required for a complete,
code compliant and operational sprinkler and standpipe system.
60.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate hydraulic calculations, detailed pipe layout, hangers and
supports, components and accessories. Indicate system controls. Indicate pipe
materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. Indicate
installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, and piping connections.
B. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including
manufacturer’s catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough-in details,
weights, support requirements, and piping connections.
C. Submit shop drawings, product data, hydraulic calculations to authority having
jurisdiction and Owner's insurance underwriter for approval. Submit proof of approval
to Architect/Engineer.
A. Designer and Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with
minimum three years’ experience.
B. Standpipe and Sprinkler Systems: Perform work to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Contractor
shall hydraulically calculate system pipe sizes in accordance with NFPA 13 and NFPA
14. Calculations and design drawings shall be sealed by a licensed Professional
Engineer registered in the PEC.
C. Equipment and Components: Bear UL and FM label or marking.
D. Valves: Bear UL and FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure
rating marked on valve body.

206
A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of
authority having jurisdiction Shall be sealed by a licensed Professional Engineer
registered in PEC.
60.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of appropriate mechanical specification section.
B. Provide extra sprinklers and storage cabinets under provisions of NFPA 13.
C. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type.
61. PRODUCTS
61.1 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER PIPING, BURIED
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: ASTM A377, AWWA C106, Class 150.
1. Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile iron, standard thickness.
2. Joints: Mechanical joints with ANSI/AWWA C111 rubber gasket.
61.2 STANDPIPE AND SPRINKLER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or ASTM A795; Schedule 40 black steel.
1. Steel Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.4, screwed fittings.
3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, screwed type.
4. Joints: Flanged, grooved or threaded.
5. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Victaulic 005 Firelock Rigid rolled groove fittings,
no equivalent. Cut grooves or O-ring type socket fittings are not allowed.
B. Pipe hangers shall conform to NFPA standard 13 requirements and shall be FM/UL
approved for use in fire sprinkler systems. Refer to specification section 21 05 29 for
additional information.
61.3 FLEXIBLE SPRINKLER HOSE
A. Basic Use:
1. Flexible stainless steel hose assemblies and a bracketing system that connect
sprinkler heads to the branch lines. Each flexible hose assembly shall be
provided with a mounting bracket and a 1-piece, leak tested sprinkler drop. The
mounting bracket shall be compatible with application.
2. Flexible hose assembly shall be pressure/leak tested system available in 2’ – 6’
hose lengths.

207
3. All flexible hose assembly shall Factory Mutual (FM) approved and UL 2443 listed
and are manufactured in an FM/UL audited facility.
4. Compatible with any FM/UL approved sprinkler head.
5. 100% leak tested system.
6. Industrial grade, all welded, no O-ring construction, with all stainless steel
components.
7. Adjustable height and sprinkler alignment / center-of-tile uniformity.
8. Rated up to 300 psi (2066 kPa) with no additional hangers required.
9. Approved for use in suspended ceiling systems with light, medium and heavy
load grids (ASTM C635, C636)
10. True-bore 1” internal corrugated hose diameter, which produces friction loss
values similar to hard pipe armovers.
11. IBC and SEI/ASCE 7-02 compliant for sprinklers installed in seismic design classes
C and D/E/F.
B. Composition and Materials:
1. Every flexible hose assembly shall come complete with the flexible hose. Each
connection shall be made from 100% factory tested Type 304 stainless steel. The
hose nipples shall be 304 stainless steel and be fully welded. Flexible hose
assembly shall be leak tested to 175 psi. It shall have burst pressure of over
2000 psi.
2. The bracket system shall be factory or shop fabricated made from galvanized
sheet metal and is approved and compatible for application. Coordinate with
flexible hose manufacturer.
61.4 GATE VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non-rising stem, handwheel,
inside screw, solid wedge disc, threaded ends, class 175, UL/FM approved.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, solid wedge
disk, flanged or grooved ends, class 175, UL/FM approved.
61.5 ANGLE VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw,
renewable composition disc, screwed ends, with backseating capacity, class 175,
UL/FM approved.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc,
flanged ends, renewable seat and disc, class 175, UL/FM approved.
61.6 BALL VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, Teflon seats
and stuffing box ring, lever handle threaded ends, blowout proof stem, full port, 600

208
WOG, UL/FM approved.
61.7 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Cast or ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat,
wafer or lug ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating
device and built-in tamper proof switch rated, UL/FM approved.
61.8 CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, screwed ends, class 200, UL/FM
approved.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged,
screwed or grooved ends, UL/FM approved.
61.9 SPRINKLER SYSTEM CONTROL VALVES
A. Cast- or ductile-iron body, flanged or grooved ends, 175 psig minimum pressure
rating, UL/FM approved.
61.10 DRAIN VALVES
A. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread, UL/FM approved.
61.11 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced
clapper to automatically actuate electrically operated alarms, with pressure retard
chamber and variable pressure trim.
B. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated red enameled gong with pressure alarm switch.
C. Water Flow Switch: Electrically supervised vane type switch for mounting horizontal
or vertical, with two contacts.
D. Fire Department Connection:
1. Type: See plans.
2. Outlets: Two way with thread size to suit local fire department hardware;
threaded dust cap and chain of matching material and finish. Cover plate and
eyelet cover not acceptable.
3. UL/FM approved, class 250 Check valve with 3/4 inch automatic drip drain,
connected to drain.
4. Drain: Automatic drip, discharged location(s) shown on drawings.
5. Escutcheon Engraving for Fire Department Connection: “AUTO SPRINKLER &
STANDPIPE SYSTEM”.

209
E. Indicator Post: UL 789, FM approved, vertical type, cast iron body with operating
wrench, extension rod. Provide adjustable cast iron barrel of sufficient length to allow
for bury depth of valve and surface elevation.
F. Curb stops: Bronze body, ground key plug or ball, wide tee head with inlet and outlet
to match service piping. Conform to all local water department requirements.
1. Service box for curb stop: Cast iron box with telescoping top section as required
for valve bury depth. Include cover with lettering "WATER," and bottom section
with base of size to fit over curb stop and barrel. Conform to all local water
department requirements.
G. Tapping sleeve and valve: Complete assembly, including two piece cast iron bolted
sleeve with outlet connections suitable for use with size and type of piping being
connected.
61.12 FLOW ALARM SWITCHES
A. FM/UL approved, water flow switches which will close contact when flow is detected.
61.13 SPRINKLERS
A. Refer to the fire sprinkler plans for sprinkler type.
B. Sprinklers shall FM/UL listed and shall be Standard model E, Viking type M Grimes, or
approved equivalent.
C. Ceiling pendent are to be semi-recessed type, white finish, with matching white
escutcheon plate.
1. In corridors, dining areas, lobbies, conference rooms, and other public areas,
provide concealed type ceiling pendant sprinklers with white cover plate and
matching white escutcheon.
D. Exposed areas shall be standard upright type, brass finish. Provide sprinkler head
guards in mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, A/V rooms, high traffic areas and areas
where heads are lower than 7'- 6" above the finished floor and/or where heads may
be vandalized.
E. Sidewall type in finish walls shall be white finish semi-recessed type with matching
white escutcheon plate.
F. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
61.14 VALVE SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
A. Standard: UL 346

210
B. Type: Electrically supervised
C. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
D. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
61.15 HOSE CONNECTIONS
A. Connection: UL 668, brass or bronze, 300 psig minimum pressure rating, NPS 2-1/2
hose valve compatible with local fire department requirements, with lugged cap,
gasket, and chain. Provide chrome-plated finish.
B. Cabinet: Recessed mounting, 18”x18”x8” fire-rated enclosure, solid panel door with
continuous steel piano hinge, white baked acrylic enamel finish, type 304 stainless
steel, door and frame materials, with appropriate labeling.
62. EXECUTION
62.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
62.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13, NFPA 14, and NFPA 24 as applicable.
B. Provide thrust blocks for each change of direction in underground fire service pipe in
accordance with NFPA 24.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain
gradient. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
D. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other
work. It shall be the primary responsibility of sprinkler contractor to coordinate with
other building trades to avoid architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical
interference’s. All necessary additional sprinklers, piping, and other equipment
required to avoid such interferences shall be provided as part of the sprinkler contract
without additional compensation after the bid is submitted. However, should a
change be made in the work of other contractors or trades from that shown on the
drawings which results in additional work for the sprinkler contractor, a reasonable
and equitable adjustment in the contract sum may be made.
E. Sprinkler locations shown on drawings are recommendations only.

211
Sprinkler/standpipe design engineer shall verify and modify locations as necessary to
provide a code-compliant, functional system. Sprinkler locations will be subject to
review of the Owner and Architect/Engineer during the shop drawing review phase.
F. Wherever possible, install piping as high as possible so as not to interfere with the
work of others. Wherever possible, place piping in concealed spaces above finished
ceilings.
G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.
I. If it is discovered during installation that any component of the sprinkler system will
be exposed to freezing conditions, the contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer
immediately.
J. Prepare all exposed pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where
pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,
and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. Paint to match finish of adjacent
walls surfaces.
K. Do not penetrate building structural members unless specifically indicated.
L. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, fire rated floors and fire rated walls. Seal
pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation
required.
M. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed
oil or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
N. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
O. Provide gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service.
P. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
Q. Pipe main system drain valve and test connection to location outside building. See
drawings.
R. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
S. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator.
T. Provide backflow preventer as shown on drawings.
U. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions,

212
or adjacent fire department connections to allow full swing of fire department wrench
handle.
V. Install outside alarm gong on building wall in location coordinated with the Architect /
Engineer.
W. All sprinklers installed in lay-in ceiling tiles shall be centered within the individual
ceiling tile. Contractor shall provide all swing joints and/or offsets required to
accomplish center locations. Ensure sprinklers are installed level with adjacent ceiling
surface.
X. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do
not receive field paint finish.
Y. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
Z. Install pressure gauge on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at
top of each standpipe.
AA. Install sprinkler storage cabinet in penthouse mechanical room. Coordinate location
with other trades.
BB. Install all valves, flow switches, and other accessories in accessible locations. Where
these components are located in a concealed area, provide access panels.
CC. Sprinkler or standpipe piping shall not be installed above any electrical panels,
electrical transformers, fire alarm panels, or EMCS panels, regardless of distance
above.
62.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Hydrostatically test entire system per NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Test shall be witnessed
by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Perform a system test with a fire department pumper truck to verify acceptable
pressure (typically 100 psig) at the most-remote standpipe hose connection. Connect
pumper truck to fire department connection for test. Coordinate with authority
having jurisdiction and local fire department.
C. Note each test in Pipe Pressure Test Log. Submit test log to Engineer for review
before final project closeout. Furnish copy of test log with operation and
maintenance data. The contractor shall furnish and sign copy of Contractor’s Material
and Test Certificate as provided in NFPA, Section 8-1 (Figure 8-1). Submit certificate
to Engineer for review before final project closeout. Furnish copy of certificate with
operation and maintenance data.

213
FIRE FIGHTING HANGER & SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. Pipe and equipment hangers, supports, anchors, saddles and shields.
B. Sleeves and seals.
C. Mechanical sleeve seals.
D. Sealants, firestop insulation, putty and compounds.
A. REFERENCES
1. NFPA 13, 14, and 24.
2. MSS SP-58 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design, and Manufacture.
3. MSS SP-69 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application.
4. MSS SP-89 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation Practices.
B. SUBMITTALS
C. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
63. PRODUCTS
A. Fire Protection and Standpipe Piping:
1. Conform to International Fire Code, NFPA 13, NFPA 14, NFPA 24, MSS SP58, MSS
SP69 and MSS SP89, as applicable.
B. Hangers and Supports:
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch, Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, band
type.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger
rods.
7. Floor Support for Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

214
63.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous
threaded.
63.3 INSERTS
63.4 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet
Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire
Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
B. Firestop Putty: Non-harding, non shrinking, UL listed.
D. Sealants:
A. Mechanical Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking EPDM
synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and
sleeve, connected with type 316 stainless steel bolts and reinforced plastic polymer
pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened,
providing a watertight and gas-tight seal and electrical insulation. Provide Advance
Products & Systems Model Innerlynx or equivalent.
solid water stop, Advance Products & Systems Model PWS or equivalent.

215
resistant coating, Advance Products & Systems Model GWS or equivalent.
64. EXECUTION
64.1 INSTALLATION
B. Install in accordance with NFPA 13, 14, and 24.
64.2 INSERTS
inches.
with slab.
A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
B. Support fire protection systems piping independently from other piping systems. Fire
with the Division 21 Contractor and other trades.
C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
F. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing
between hangers.

216
G. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at
hub.
H. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
I. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
J. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for non-insulated copper pipe.
K. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
L. Prime coat steel hangers and supports in the mechanical room and other exposed
M. Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve specified
pipe slopes.
64.4 FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter flashing where piping penetrate weather
or waterproofed walls and floors.
B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for sound control.
64.5 SLEEVES
penetrations and wall penetrations into exposed areas. Pipe sleeves are not required
for penetrations through non-rated concealed partitions.
B. At the Contractor’s option, pipe sleeves may be omitted if the wall or floor is core
drilled, except in areas potentially exposed to wet conditions (such as mechanical
rooms, loading dock, generator room, penthouse, kitchen, etc.).
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

217
E. Sleeves through floors shall be grinded flush with finish floor level. In areas
potentially exposed to wet conditions (such as mechanical rooms, loading dock,
generator room, penthouse, kitchen, etc.), sleeve shall extend a minimum of 2” above
finish floor.
F. Where piping penetrates non-rated ceilings or walls, close off space between pipe and
adjacent work with urethane rod stock and caulk air tight.
G. Seal pipe penetrations through non-rated floors.
H. Where piping penetrates rated floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or
duct with appropriate fire rated sealant, insulation, putty or compound. Refer to the
Drawings for fire/smoke rated wall locations and the appropriate ratings.
I. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons on piping at finished surfaces.
J. Provide mechanical seals and sleeves through exterior wall and floor penetrations and
64.6 HANGER SCHEDULES
Reference International Fire Code, NFPA 13, and NFPA 14 where applicable.
FIRE FIGHTING GAUGES
A. Pressure gauges and pressure gauge taps.
B. Piping pressure and temperature test plugs.
64.8 REFERENCE SECTION 21 05 00 FOR THE FOLLOWING:
A. REFERENCES
B. SUBMITTALS
C. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

218
65. PRODUCTS
65.1 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Type: General use, ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon-tube type,
B. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2-inches diameter.
C. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch NPS.
D. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
F. Range: Conform to the following:
65.2 PRESSURE GAUGE ACCESSORIES
end.
A. Test Plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS fitting and 2 self-
sealing valve-type core inserts, suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly
from a dial-type thermometer or pressure gage. Test plug shall have gasketed and
threaded cap with retention chain and body of length to extend beyond insulation.
Pressure rating shall be 500 psig.
1. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas, 20 to 200 deg F: Neoprene.

219
66. EXECUTION
66.1 GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 13 and NFPA 14
requirements.
66.2 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge valve, located on pipe at
most readable position.
C. Pressure Gauge Ball Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install syphon in lieu of
66.3 TEST PLUGS
cap.
A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.
Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory-finished surfaces. Replace
cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint
FIRE FIGHTING IDENTFICATION
General
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Pipe Markers.
D. Ceiling Tacks/Stickers.
A. REFERENCES

220
B. RELATED SECTIONS
C. SUBMITTALS
D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
E. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
1. Record actual locations of tagged valves.
67. PRODUCTS
67.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Equipment Mark Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black
letters (matching equipment mark indicated on drawings) on light contrasting
background color, with minimum 3/4 inch high letters.
B. Equipment Nameplates: Factory-applied permanent nameplate indicating the
manufacturer’s name, model, serial number, temperature and pressure design, and
any other data necessary to conform with specified requirements. On equipment
installed outdoors, nameplate shall be stamped steel or engrave plastic.
67.2 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light
contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter or square.
B. Chart: Typewritten list that is plastic laminated and mounted in mechanical room.
Valve list is to coordinate with mechanical piping schematics if provided on plans.
C. Pipe Schematics: Valve numbers are to be labeled on Engineer schematic drawings,
plastic laminated and schematic shall be mounted in mechanical room.
67.3 PIPE MARKERS
A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive
backing and printed markings; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow
and identification of fluid being conveyed.
67.4 CEILING TACKS
A. Description: 7/8” diameter ceiling tacks.
B. Color code as follows:
1. Red - Fire dampers/smoke dampers, sprinkler/standpipe system valves

221
68. EXECUTION
68.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
68.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear
lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic tape pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Directional
arrow tape shall be overlapped to ensure proper adhesion and no peeling of tape in
future.
D. Identify hose connections cabinets and drain termination points with plastic
nameplates.
E. Identify tags on backflow preventers, drain valves, test connections, risers, alarm
devices, and hose connections with tags. Label each valve as normally open or
normally closed, as appropriate.
F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
G. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. For pipes ¾”
and smaller, identify piping with tags. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure
when applicable, i.e. low pressure steam, high pressure steam. Install in clear view
from floor and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 15 feet on
straight runs including risers and drops, more often in congested areas, adjacent to
each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each
obstruction. Provide a minimum one label per pipe per room. Where pipes are
racked, install pipe markers on each pipe in the same location to aid in differentiating
each pipe in the rack.
Provide ceiling tacks or machine generated labels to locate valves, switches, etc. above
lay-in type panel ceilings. Locate ceiling tack on the ceiling grid closest to equipment.
SAFETY ASPECT FOR FIRE FIGHTING

222
The Fire Safety Manual has the following components:
1) Plan for fire prevention & control.
2) Systems for fire prevention & control.
3)
4)
5) Codes for announcement of fire related emergency, procedures and communication
protocols for the same.
Responsibilities of different departments in case of fire.
1)
2)
3)
4) Electrical Safety & System.
SAFETY ASPECT FOR FIRE FIGHTING
1) A multi disciplinary committee, which has Fire Safety Officer as a member, holds facility
rounds at least once a year
2) for non-clinical areas & twice a year for clinical areas. Fire Safety requirements are on
the checklist of the said
3) committee and the reports are submitted in writing to the safety committee.
4) The safety committee has a system whereby all fire safety concerns are addressed.
5) The mock drills are conducted and the reports submitted to the safety committee.
Necessary action is taken to
6) address any issues that crop up during mock drills.
7) The fire exits are well defined and end on the ground floor or refuge area or any safe
place decided by the
8) management.
9) The Fire Signages are appropriate and placed at the right locations.
10) Emergency fire signages are glow in dark signages.
11) The Fire Signages are visible and are bilingual, with one local language.
12) The egress routes are free from any materials that would cause hindrance in evacuation.
13) The Fire Doors have a proper fire rating and open outside.
14) The Fire Doors preferably have panic bars.
15) The Fire Doors remain open at all times.

223
16) The Fire cabinets are open all the time.
17) The Manual Call Points have means to break the glass
18) The Fire Alarm syatems are properly tested and maintained and a record is kept for the
same.
19) The Emergency Exit signs should be displayed prominently.
20) The stairwells used for evacuation are pressurized in case of fire emergency.
21) lifts are not used in case of fire.
22) HVAC system has appropriate fire dampers to prevent spread of fire that function
properly in case of fire. The
23) dampers are tested and have a regular preventive maintenance schedule.
24) All the equipments have an organized preventive maintenance schedule that is recorded
and stickers put on the
25) equipments showing the date of preventive maintenance check and the next date for
maintenance.
26) Appropriate type & number of fire extinguishers have been installed according to the
type of fire that could take
27) place.
28) The Fire Extinguishers have a regular preventive maintenance schedule and stickers are
put showing the date of
29) checking and the next scheduled date for checking.
30) 10% of Fire Extinguishers are used every year for checking the same.
31) . The building has an approachable peripheral road around it for access by fire brigade.
32) The Fire Pump House is maintained properly and the pumps have pressure gauges that
have been calibrated and
33) appropriate pressures are maintained in the fire hydrant & sprinkler lines.
34) . There is a proper training program for handling fire emergencies and training records
are maintained. The entire
35) staff is imparted fire safety training.
36) . The staff is aware of the fire fighting systems, responsibilities during fire emergencies,
evacuation routes &
37) techniques, conversant with the type of fire extinguishers and their area of use, trained
to operate fire
38) extinguishers, code announcements and assembly points in case of fire.
39) . The organization has policies & protocols for storing, dispensing & use of flammable
materials. Appropriate warning boards for all signs

224
34. Electrical safeties are in place. Preventive maintenance & testing is done at regular pre
decided intervals and are
recorded and stickers affixed.
35. All electrical panels have a rubber mat in front of them.
36. The earthing system is tested regularly.
37. The UPS batteries are checked regularly by loading the same periodically to check any
heating up etc.
38. There is proper ventilation in panel, UPS & equipment rooms to avoid overheating
40. The pumps used for pumping fuel are of flame proof construction.
41. The Provisions are there to take care of fuel overflow.
42. Flues are properly insulated.
Exit Facilities:
1) In buildings or sections occupied by bed-ridden patients where the floor area is over 280
m2, facilities shall be
2) provided to move patients in hospital beds to the other side of a smoke barrier from any
part of such building or
3) section not directly served by approved horizontal exits or exits from the first floor (floor
2) of a building to the
4) outside.
5)
every floor, including basement,
6) of every building or section:
1. Doors leading directly outside the building;
2. Stairways
3. Ramps;
4. Horizontal exits; and
5. Fire tower.
7) All required exits that serve as egress from hospital or infirmary sections shall be not
less than 2 m in clear width
8) including patient bedroom doors to permit transportation of patients on beds, litters, or
mattresses. The minimum

225
width of corridors serving patients bedrooms in buildings shall be 2400 mm. For detailed
information on
recommendations for buildings and facilities for the physically handicapped, reference may be
made to good
practice [4(27)].
Patient lifts shall also
be provided with enough room for transporting a stretcher trolley.
fire resistant walls. Doors
in fire resistant walls
shall be so installed that these may normally be kept in open position, but will close
automatically. Corridor door
openings in smoke barriers shall be not less than 2000 mm in width. Provision shall also be
made for double swing
single/double leaf type door.

226
STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR MEDICAL
GAS AND VACUUM INSTALLATIONS
INTRODUCTION
1.1 General

227
This specification contains standard technical requirements for medical gas and vacuum
installations and anesthetic mask scavenging systems.
1.2 Project Specification
This standard specification and drawings will at times have to be read in conjunction with
project specification and drawings in which the specific requirements, scope and layout of
the installation are set out. Where contradictions arise between such project specifications
and drawings and this standard specification and standard drawings, the project drawings
and project specification will take precedence.
1.3 Queries
Where queries or disputes in interpretation of this specification and standard drawings visà-
vis project specifications and drawings arise, the matter must be referred to the client or his
duly appointed representative, whose decision will be final and binding
1.4 Competence of Installation Technicians
It is a requirement that all pipe fitters employed in medical gas and vacuum installations
are able to show proof of knowledge of, and experience in such installations before
commencing work on a medical gas and vacuum system.
.5 Permit to Work
Prior to any person working with MC gases supplier,instaliation team must be experienced in
the desired field
1.5.1 General
The Permit to Work system is applicable to the servicing, repair, alteration and extension of
existing installations within a Hospital, or any action, such as the closure of an isolating valve,
which restricts the supply. This means that Permits shall also be obtained before any major
item of central plant, e.g. manifold, control panel, compressor, or vacuum pump (including and
standby plant), is isolated prior to servicing, repair or overhaul. The system is applicable to work
on installations already in service.
Routine Changing of Cylinders
Permits are not necessary for the routine replacement of cylinders on manifolds nor for the
recharging of liquid oxygen vessels, provided there is no danger of the supply being disrupted
when these tasks are undertaken.
Planned Preventive Maintenance (PPM)

228
Work Permits will not be required for routine daily or weekly inspections (where the service is
not interrupted), but follow-up work will usually involve the issue of a training
Substantial Alterations, Extensions to, or Overhaul
Overhaul of Existing Installations Work described on the Permit should normally be completed
in one day, though provision is made for some carryover. Work likely to take more than one day
may be initiated on the Permit, but should be carried out under normal procedures for
engineering work of this nature and commissioned in accordance with the requirements of this
specification
Standard Drawings
The standard drawings listed here form part of this specification and must be read in
conjunction with it: -
Key to Symbols
Typical Operating Theatre Layout
Typical Layout of Medical Gas and Vacuum Outlet Points at Bed Head
Vacuum Pipe Take-off Details
Diagrammatic Layout – Medical Compressed Air Piping and Equipment
Typical Oxygen and Gas Bank Layout
Diagrammatic Layout of Vacuum Plant Pipe Work and Equipment
Typical Nitrous Oxide Gas Bank Arrangement
Medical Gas and Vacuum Isolating Valve Cabinet
Theatre Pendant Details
High Pressure Compressed Air Outlets
Anesthetic Scavenging System for Operating Theatres
Concrete Base for Air Compressors and Vacuum Pumps
Gas Evaporator Enclosure Details
Details of Gas Cylinder Connections
Wiring Diagram for Vacuum and Compressed Air Plants
Typical Wiring Diagram for Medical Gas and Vacuum Warning Light Panels
Typical Warning Light Panel Layout

229
Alternate Compressor and Vacuum Plant Wiring Detail
Wiring Diagram for Anesthetic Mask Exhaust Fan
Other Standards and Publication
The following publications must be read in conjunction with this specification: -
Occupation Health and Safety Act (Act No. 85 of 1994) As amended.
Standard Specification for Electrical Installations Pertaining to Mechanical Equipment.
SABS 099 – 1974 The construction of air receivers.
SABS 460 – 1975 Copper and copper alloy tubing.
SABS 763 – 1977 Hot-dip (galvanised) zinc coatings.
SABS 948 – 1978 Three phase induction motors part 1 low voltage standard motors.
SABS 1091 – 1975 National colour standard for paint.
SABS 1189 – 1978 Single phase induction motors.
SABS 1062 – 1985 Vacuum and pressure gauges.
SABS 1409 – 1986 Outlet sockets and probes for medical services used in hospitals.
SABS 0224 Non flammable medical gas pipeline systems.
SABS 0142 Wiring of Premises
CKS 64 – 1967 Compressed Air for breathing.
CKS 332 – 1977 Industrial V-belts.
CKS 605 – 1987 Medical gas regulators.
R158 Regulation Hospital norms.
PROCEDURE FOR VALIDATION AND VERIFICATION OF MEDICAL GAS PIPELINE SYSTEMS
2.1 GENERAL
The following tests, as applicable, are required for any additional/modifications to piping. Tests
are not required after servicing of or repairs to outlet points.
2.1.1 Important Notes –

230
The system being tested may not be commissioned until all tests as specified have been
satisfactorily completed.
The pre commissioning tests
are to be executed/witnessed by: -
a) the contractors authorised representative
b) the responsible competent person
c) the project manager (if applicable)
d) the consultant (if applicable)
The identity tests
are to be executed/witnessed by the persons as listed in
above, plus: -
e) The responsible clinical technician
f) Anesthetist/medical officer
It is incumbent upon the contractor executing the works to submit a written request for
testing/commissioning to the project manager or competent person, at least 14 days prior to
the proposed date. The project manager/competent person will then advise of all parties in
writing of the confirmed date.
The contractor is to provide all necessary pressure testing equipment and gas. .
The sequence of tests in this procedure is important and should be followed.
All tests will need to be planned and carried out by the appropriate persons. Forward planning
will be necessary to ensure that the necessary persons and test equipment will be available.
2 Sleeving and supports
3 Leakage
4 Cross-connection
TABLE 2 SUMMARY OF TESTS REQUIRED ON PIPELINE SYSTEM
Test Order Description
Procedure

231
• Connect a suitable pressure-measuring device to the pipeline. Fill the pipeline with test gas at
the specified test pressure. Disconnect and remove the gas supply. Record the pipeline and
room temperature initially and again at the end of the test period (24 hours).
Results
• The rate of pressure drop during the test should be less than 0.025% per hour, except for
pressure changes due to temperature variations. The pressure change due to temperature
variation is approximately 0.35% per ºC. Record the results
Cross Connection
• Any links between the systems should be removed before this test is carried out. All pipelines
should be at atmospheric pressure and all isolating valves should be open. A single pressure
source should be used and connected to one pipeline at a time. This should remain under
pressure throughout the test. At least one base block on all other pipelines should be fully
open.
Procedure
• Connect one pipeline to the pressure source. Check that no gas flows from the open base
block on the other pipelines, which are not under pressure. Each terminal unit on the pipeline
under test should be opened, checked for flow and then reblanked. When testing has been
completed on one pipeline, the pressure source should be removed and that pipeline should be
left open to atmosphere. Another pipeline should then be pressurised and the procedure
repeated.
Results
• The contractor should record that satisfactory tests have been completed on Form
TESTS ON THE PIPELINE SYSTEM
Leakage from Compressed Medical Gas Systems
• The leakage test described above should have been completed satisfactorily. All terminal unit
valves and other devices such as safety valves and pressure sensors should be fitted. The supply
system should be isolated from the pipeline. There should be no links between the pipeline
systems. The test may be carried out on sections of each pipeline, provided no section is
omitted. Different sections and pipelines may be tested at the same time.
Procedure
• Connect a suitable pressure-measuring device to the pipeline. Fill the pipeline (or section of
pipeline) with test gas at pipeline distribution pressure. This filling procedure may also be used
to measure the volume of the pipeline. Disconnect and remove the gas supply. Note the
pressure and temperature initially and again at the end of the test period.

232
Results
• The rate of pressure drop during the test period should not exceed the value specified by the
formula given , after allowing for pressure changes due to temperature variation. Record the
results on Form
Leakage into Vacuum Systems
• The leakage test described above should have been completed satisfactorily. All terminal unit
valves and other devices such as pressure sensors should be fitted. The vacuum supply should
be connected to the system under test.
Procedure
• Connect a vacuum gauge to the system. Run the vacuum supply system to maintain pipeline
distribution pressure until the pipeline system is dried out. With the system at pipeline
distribution pressure, isolate the vacuum supply system. Note the vacuum initially and again
after one hour.
Results
• Record the results on Form . The pressure increase after one hour should not exceed 10 kPa.
There is no additional allowance for temperature variation in this test.
Closure and Zoning of Area Valve Service Units
• The test specified in paragraphs above must have been completed satisfactorily Procedure
The procedure for this test is as follows: -
a) connect a pressure-measuring device to the system. The system should be at pipeline
distribution pressure, with all Area Valve Service Units (AVSU’s) closed;
b) depressurise the pipeline downstream of the most remote valve from the source to 1 bar (g)
pressure by opening a terminal unit valve. Close the terminal unit valve;
c) note the total number of terminal units controlled by the AVSU and check that these
terminal units are correctly labelled and that they are all at the test pressure;
d) if necessary, re-adjust the test pressure to 1 bar
(g). Read the pressure in the section under test and then read the pressure again after 15
minutes; e) check the AVSU for leakage to the environment in both the closed and open
positions.
Results
• Record the results on Form . There should be no pressure increase downstream of the valve
under test.

233
• On each pipeline system, open the area valve service units in sequence towards the supply
system repeating the above procedure.
Cross Connection
• These tests should be carried out on one pipeline at a time. All pipelines should be at
atmospheric pressure and AVSUs should be open. A single pressure source should be used and
connected to one pipeline at a time, which should remain under pressure throughout the test.
Procedure The procedure is as follows: -
a) connect one pipeline to the pressure source at pipeline distribution pressure;
b) in order to depressurise the other system, insert an open probe into one terminal unit on
each other system. Check that no gas flows from these probes (into or out of);
c) check that gas flows through every terminal unit of the pipeline under pressure; d) check
that there is no gas flow from any other terminal units when they are opened with the correct
probes.
Results
• Record the results on Form if there are no cross connections.
• Repeat the procedure described above on each pipeline in turn, including vacuum, preferably
at one session. This test should be repeated in full if any subsequent modifications are made to
the pipeline system during construction.
Functional Tests of Terminal Units
• These tests may be carried out at the same time as the cross connection test described above.
In this case, only one system at a time is pressurised.
Procedure
The procedure is as follows: -
a) before commencing the tests, check that the test equipment meets the requirements given
in Appendix C for the system under test. All terminal units should be complete with the fascia
plate;
b) insert the test device described in Appendix C into each terminal unit in turn on the system
under test.
Note that the pressure drop at the specified flow does not exceed the value given in paragraph
c) check that the gas specific probe can be inserted, captured and released and that it does not
swivel in horizontally mounted terminal units;

234
d) check that no gas is released at each terminal unit by the probes for all other gases used and
that no probes can be engaged;
e) check that all NIST connectors (probes) accept the NIST probe for the correct gas and that
mechanical connection is made. Check that the NIST probes for all other gases do not make
mechanical connection;
f) note that the NIST self sealing device functions correctly.
g) NISTs incorporated in certified assemblies do not need to be tested.
Results
• Record the results on Form.
Performance Tests of the Pipeline System
• These tests should be carried out on one system at a time.
• All AVSUs should be open. Connect a supply of test gas at the supply source of sufficient
capacity to meet the total design flow of the system. The vacuum supply system may be used to
test the vacuum pipeline system.
Procedure
a) insert leaks into selected terminal units, AVSUs and NISTs as appropriate, throughout the
system under test to provide a total flow equal to the total design flow of that system;
b) run the system so that the pressure/vacuum at the source meets the specification;
c) check the gauge pressure at the specified flow at selected terminal units throughout the
system.
d) record the results on Form if they are in accordance with the specifications;
e) remedial work may be needed if these specifications are not met.
Supply System Tests
General
• All supply systems should be installed and connected to normal and standby power supplies.
Procedure
a) the functions and operating parameters of each item of plant should be checked;

235
b) the supply systems should be shown to operate on the essential power supply;
c) all pipe work joints should be tested for leakage at normal operating pressure;
d) the compressor plant should be tested for leaks during normal running. Minor leaks
detectable as bubbles are acceptable.
Results
• It should be confirmed that the manufacturer's specification meets the requirements of the
contract specification.
• Record the results on Form , if they are in accordance with the specific checklist.
Safety Valve Inspection
• Tests of safety valves are not required.
Procedure
a) inspect each safety valve to check that the discharge capacity and the set pressure are in
accordance with the contract specification;
b) check that the safety valves conform to BS6759:
c) inspect the certification supplied with each valve.
Results
• Record the results on Form .
Warning System Tests
General
• The tests should be carried out for one function at a time on one system at a time.
• All alarm systems should be fully installed and in operation.
Procedure
a) adjust the pressure in each pipeline system either locally or throughout the pipeline system;
b) observe that the appropriate changes in warning system conditions occur;
c) check that the warning system will operate from the essential power source.

236
Results
• Record the results on Form .
Verification of Drawings
Procedure
• Inspect the as fitted drawings, to ensure that all variations from the contract drawings have
been recorded.
Results
• Record the results on Form
Filling with Medical Air
• When an indefinite period may elapse before the system is taken into use, it should first be
tested for particulate contamination, using medical air, as the test gas.
Procedure
• If the test is satisfactory, the system should be filled with medical air and left pressurised at
pipeline distribution pressure.
Results
• If the results are satisfactory, they should be recorded on Form , which should be annotated
to indicate that the system has been tested with medical air.
Special Connectors
• At the end of the contract period, the contractor should ensure that any special connectors
are removed from site. Purging and Filling with Specific Gas
General
The following should be carried out prior to purging and filling with the specific gas: -
a) all systems may be filled with their specific gases at the same time;
b) all previous tests should have been satisfactorily completed;
c) each pipeline system should be connected to its source of supply, with all AVSUs open;
d) all sources of test gas should be disconnected;
e) all special connectors and cylinders should be removed from site.
Procedure

237
The procedure is as follow: -
a) starting at atmospheric pressure (except for vacuum systems), fill each pipeline system to
pipeline distribution pressure;
b) with the supply system on, purge each terminal unit with a known volume of gas at least
equal to the volume of the pipeline being tested;
c) for vacuum systems, purging is not necessary;
d) leave each system at pipeline distribution pressure with the supply system connected.
Results
• Record on Form that the systems have been filled.
Tests for Gas Identity
General
• All systems should preferably be tested at the same time. The previous tests must have been
satisfactorily completed.
Procedure •
The tests should be carried out at all terminal units, using the medical gas analyser supplied
Results
• Record the results on Form
System Taken into Use When all the tests have been satisfactorily completed, the construction
labels should be removed and the system may be taken into use.
MEDICAL GAS PIPING INSTALLATION
Quality of Medical Gas Piping
Medical Gas (‘MG’) tubing is designed to meet the stringent requirements laid down for the
distribution of medical gases in hospital services. Two categories are recognized, viz: -
a) High pressure distribution; and
b) Low-pressure distribution. Only ‘MG’ grade to be used.
The necessary of tube bore cleanliness cannot be over-emphasized.
Compliance with S.A.B.S. Specifications All piping used for medical gas and vacuum installations
must be of copper and in compliance with SABS 460 – 1975 (latest amendments). All copper
tubing must be in metric sizes and comply with the sizes as used for domestic plumbing

238
services. “Half hard” piping is required up to 35mm outside diameter in straight lengths 5,5 or 3
metres long and hard drawn piping for all larger sizes in 5,5m straight lengths.
Physical Properties
High Pressure Applications “Serpentines” may be in soft annealed copper coils. Manifolds shall
be in hard drawn straight copper in exact lengths of 5,5 metres or 3 metres or as described in
paragraph 3.7.
Low Pressure Applications
All tubes will normally be in the “half hard” condition as standard, up to 35mm outside
diameter to facilitate bending but when specially needed and for larger sizes tubes can be
specified to be in the hard drawn condition.
Freedom from Defects
Eddy current testing shall be carried out on all tubes to ensure freedom from physical defects
as specified in ASTM Standard E243. Contractors may be required, at the discretion of the
concerned authority to obtain copies of documentation proving compliance with this
requirement from the piping supplier.
Bore Cleanliness
General
All tubes shall be processed in such a manner that the bores are bright and clean. The use of
carbon tetrachloride as a cleaning agent is not permissible. The measure of acceptable
cleanliness shall be that specified in ASTM B.280. This requires that when the interior of a test
sample of the tube is washed with trichloro-ethylene, or other solvent such as redistilled
chloroform or re-distilled trichloro-ethylene, the residue remaining upon evaporation of the
solvent shall not exceed 0,0376 g/m2.
The following processes have to be undertaken on Medical Grade Copper Tubing before and
after annealing at the manufacturer’s premises.
a) Blowpipes clean with medically pure compressed air.
b) Use steam vapour aggravation next for cleaning inside of pipes.
c) Use a hot detergent for washing of the pipes internally.
d) Finally use a soft abrasive cleaning organic liquid. The final responsibility for ensuring that
clean tubing is used in the installation rests with the Contractor. The above steps are required
for all the tubing sizes in order to ensure compliance with specfication

239
Identification and Packing
Identification
All straight length tubes shall be identified by means of a continuous red line printed along the
length of the tube, and shall have the ends protected with red plastic caps to prevent ingress of
foreign matter during storage and transport. All coiled tubes shall have their ends mechanically
sealed and shall be marked with approved seal. All piping must be stored off the ground in a
clean, safe area with the ends capped at all times.
Packaging
All straight length tubes shall be packed and delivered in timber cases of suitable size and
capacity, normally half tonne (500kg) net. All coiled tubes shall be packed in approved. standard
cardboard boxes and marked approved seal.
Valves and Fittings Valves
All valves are to be ball valves, with stainless steel bodies and balls and approved. They shall be
suitable for a working pressure of 1000kPa gauge. Pipelines must be properly secured by holder
bats in close proximity to the and on either side of each valve. Valves shall be fitted into the
pipeline by means of capillary hard soldered joints containing silver . All types of valves
tendered for shall be submitted for approval to the authority concerend prior to installation.
The valve handle shall be the same colour as allocated to the gas.
Fittings
Bends and tees must be of wrought copper capillary fittings with internal stops. Note that
where pipe bends of a radius greater than 5 pipe diameters are required the tubing may be
bent, provided that no flattening or thinning of the tube occurs at any point. Bends in Class 2
tubing shall be free from flattening, buckling or thinning of the tube wall at any point. Form
bends are permissible up to 28mm diameter. Elbow type fittings shall not be used unless for
special purposes specified in the project specification.
Note :further that makeshift methods of forming reducers, tees, joints, etc. Such as butt brazing
of piping will under no circumstances be acceptable. All clean and degreased valves and fittings
shall be supplied to site in individual heat sealed plastic bags, which may only be opened just
prior to installation.
3.3 Pipe Joints
Only capillary hard solder fittings for M.G. copper classes 0 and 2 tubing, shall be used up to
28mm outside diameter. Class 0 to be utilised in all larger sizes. The fittings shall be degreased
similar to the Medical grade copper tubing. Medical grade copper tubes joined by means of

240
capillary fittings shall be jointed with hard solder with working temperatures between 600ºC
and 700º, using: -
a) Self fluxing copper/phosphorous 7% minimum silver rod, as Afrox Silfos 15, or other
approved.
b) When using self-fluxing hard solder, care must be taken to ensure that the joint is not
overheated. Alcohol or borax based mixtures or resin and similar paste fluxes may under no
circumstances be used. All screw joints must be sealed by tinning the male thread with soft
solder.
Pipe Sizing and Routing
General
Special provision may be made in the building for holes through, and chases in the walls for
piping by the building contractor, but all sleeves, brackets and fixings must be done in terms of
the medical gas contract. Where the builder is to do the chasing, it will be the responsibility of
the Medical Gas and Vacuum Contractor to point out to the builder in good time the exact
position and size of openings and chases. The Medical Gas Contractor will beheld responsible at
al times for the final positioning of outlets and conduits.
Pipe Sizing
The size of pipes for main runs and branch lines are as shown on the project drawings. The gas
flow rates in MG piping must be as per the guidelines laid down by the U.K. Department of
Health and Social Security in Hospital Technical Memorandum No. 22 and SABS 051. When ring
mains are used these sizes can be reduced. Terminal connections to all outlet points, except as
shown otherwise, may not be less than 10mm OD for oxygen, 12mm for vacuum and scavenge
piping and 6mm for nitrous oxide.
Pipe Routes
Both horizontal and vertical pipe runs shall conform to the following sequence. From top to
bottom and from left to right as appropriate. Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide, Vacuum, Low Pressure Air,
High Pressure Compressed Air and Scavenging. Horizontal pipe runs shall whenever possible not
be lower than 2400mm above the floor level, unless they are suitably protected and accessible
for maintenance staff. Wherever practicable piping is to run on external walls below the eaves.
Wall Outlet Points
All wall outlet points shall be positioned 1,5m above finished floor level, the position in the
room being shown on the project drawings.
Pipe Supports
Pipe runs in roof spaces, covered ways, under eaves and on the outside of buildings, i.e. where
not in a space normally inhabited, shall be secured with “APPROVED” clips. Other types of

241
holder batts, which Tenderers may wish to offer, must first received the approval of the
Secretary for Health. In all cases dissimilar metals must be isolated. The centre distance of
supports shall not exceed the following up to and including: - Up to 10mm outside diameter
pipe - 1,00m 12 to 15mm outside diameter pipe - 1,25m 22mm outside diameter pipe - 1,80m
28mm outside diameter pipe - 2,5m 35 to 76mm - see project design drawings It is required
that piping be run in support trays except when mounted against a wall. Unistrut P4000 or
equal approved supports shall be used for this duty. The support shall be fixed to the structure
by means of at least two suitable brackets, expanding and/or fixing bolts. The pipes shall be
fixed to the support by means of approved series clamps or equal.
Protection of Piping
Where pipes are to be hidden (i.e. buried in walls or structures) they shall run in conduit or
other suitable hard protective piping, or run in metal channels built in and flush with the
finished wall surface, with suitable covers painted to match the wall finish. Where pipes are to
be run in a location where they may be damaged by trolleys, stretchers or similar mobile
equipment, or where they may be interfered with by the general public or other unauthorized
person, they shall be protected by encasement in pies or metal channels up to a heights of 2m.
The route of the pipes shall be so selected that they are out of the reach of traffic and the
general public. Piping in ducts, roof spaces or above suspended ceilings shall be laid in
Admiralty type cable trays. These cable trays must wherever possible be installed 150mm clear
of any other piping or conduits run in the same roof space, unless otherwise authorized by the
Secretary for Health. All pipes in operating theatres shall be concealed or built in. Surface
mounting in existing buildings will be considered in all other areas if sanctioned by the
Secretary for Health. Where the pipes pass through walls and ceilings, etc., they shall be
sleeved and provided with wall plates, which shall be rust free and painted to match the
general wall finish. Where several pipes, of different diameter are surface mounted side by
side, the saddle centre distance appropriate for the smallest diameter pipe shall also be used
for the larger pipes.
Brackets Pipe support
brackets and clamps shall be hot-dip galvanised to SABS 763.
CYLINDER GAS BANK MANIFOLDS AND PLANT
General The central gas bank shall comprise two banks of gas cylinders main and reserve,
connected to a manifold. Both main and reserve banks shall be connected to the system, in
such a way that only one bank will supply the system at any one time. When the operating bank
becomes depleted or should the supply pressure fall, the reserve bank shall automatically come
into use and the depleted bank shall be shut off. Electrically operated changeover panels are
not acceptable. All gas cylinder manifolds shall be of the duplex type with semi-automatic
change over from one bank to the other and at the same time actuating the warning system.
Each bank shall supply the system through its own pressure reducer. A master pressure reducer
shall ensure the correct line pressure no matter which bank is in operation. Each pressure
reducer shall be fitted with a safety valve set to operate at 1 ½ times the working pressure and

242
be vented to atmosphere. The gas cylinder banks shall be placed in rooms indicated on the
drawings and shall be of the capacities indicated in the project specification. On site
manufacture of manifolds is not permitted. Oxygen and compressed air banks must preferably
be in separate rooms, in order to avoid mixing of cylinders as these cylinders have identical bull-
nose outlets. Pressure gauges indicating the cylinder and supply line pressures shall be
incorporated in the manifold and on al pressure reducers. A service point (i.e. a medical gas
outlet) shall be connected into the man line from each pressurized gas line in the plant room
immediately after the main line valve. The service point height shall be about 1,5 meters above
the finished floor level.
Manifold Materials
The fittings used to make up the manifold shall be forged bronze while the tubing shall be of
heavy gauge copper. Pigtails shall be of annealed copper. All the high-pressure side equipment
of the manifold shall withstand a test pressure of 40000kPa gauge. Piping used in the
manufacture of manifolds must be of medical grade piping and subject to the same cleaning
procedures as for piping used in the gas reticulation . Pressure test certificates must be supplied
with all manifolds.
Manifold Equipment
The manifolds shall accommodate the number of cylinders specified and shall be arranged as
shown on the drawings. Pigtails for connecting the manifold to the cylinders shall be long and
flexible enough to allow easy connection to the cylinders without having to strain the tube.
Each outlet for connecting the manifold to the pigtail shall have a header valve. Pigtails shall be
connected to these valves with high-pressure gas connections and shall have standard bull-nose
cylinder valve connections for cylinder coupling. The regulator assembly, which shall operate on
the semi-automatic changeover system, shall be as shown on the main drawings and shall
include.
i) Two pressure regulators set at 600 kPa gauge.
ii) Two pressure regulators set at 400 kPa for oxygen, nitrous oxide and compressed
air manifolds. The gas main diagrams show the position of pressure gauges. At least
five pressure gauges must be installed: -
iii) one high pressure gauge for each bank;
iv) one pressure gauge for each bank to indicate the intermediate pressure; and
v) one pressure gauge to indicate the low pressure on the distribution system. All
pressure gauges shall have a maximum reading of not more than twice normal
working pressure. A stop valve shall be provided on the low pressure outlet side of
each regulator. The whole manifold regulator assembly etc., shall be securely bolted
to a channel iron frame or directly to the wall and shall not be enclosed. All piping
must be surface mounted on the front of the frame. All new or replacement
changeover panels are to be as “Afrox GPA Standard” or other approved. All gas
cylinders shall stand against a rack with individual safety chains (approximately 20 x
14 x 4mm diameter) for each cylinder to prevent these from falling over. These shall

243
encircle the cylinders at about 2/3 of their height. Safety chains shall be secured
with eye bolts and shall have a deep hood on the other end. Safety valves shall be
fitted after all pressure reducing stations.
vi) Safety and pressure reducing valve capacities shall be confirmed by means of
manufacturer’s graphs, which are to be supplied by the contractor.
Cleaning After assembly,
the manifold, header, fittings and connections shall be blown out with medical compressed
air and cleaned as specification. A brass or copper plate shall be mounted on the manifold,
stating test pressure, date of manufacture and manufacturer’s name. A certificate shall be
submitted to the Secretary for Health to this effect by the Testing Authority as outlined in
specified
Operating Instructions Detailed,
clearly printed instructions on how to operate the manifold and including any drawings,
which may be necessary, shall be provided by the contractor. These shall be mounted in
glass fronted frames fixed to the wall above the manifold by the contractor.
Accommodation
The accommodation required for the medical gas installation is as follows:
- i) A machine room for the medical air compressor, vacuum and scavenging units.
ii) A gas bank room, or partitioned area, for oxygen and nitrous oxide cylinders.
iii) A separate partitioned area for each of medical compressed air and each other medical
gas that may be required.
iv) An empty gas cylinder store.
v) A full cylinder gas store. Note that all plant room doors must be fully louvred with
aluminium Trox (or other approved) weather louvres, complete with approximately 15 x
15mm bird screening. Conveyor type rubber belting is required on floors where full or
empty gas bottles are to be stored or connected to manifolds as well as at gas bottle off-
loading points.
Safety and Relief Valve Settings
Safety valve and alarm settings shall be as perspecfication of system installed. Percentage of
Nominal Operating Pressure Nitrous Oxide System All Other Positive Systems 160 Maximum
Safety Valve Full Discharge Maximum Safety Valve Full Discharge 155 140 Maximum Safety
Valve Lift Maximum Safety Valve Lift 135 130 Minimum Safety Valve Lift Minimum Safety
Valve Lift 125 Over Pressure Alarm 120 Over Pressure Alarm Maximum Operating Pressure
110 Maximum Operating Pressure Nominal Operating Pressure 100 Nominal Operating
Pressure Minimum Operating Pressure 90 Minimum Operating Pressure Under Pressure

244
Alarm 80 Under Pressure Alarm .Pressure Safety Valve and Alarm Pressure Settings Note
that safety valve exhaust piping is not required – the valve may vent into the plant room.
MEDICAL GAS WARNING SYSTEM
General
Visual and audible alarms will be a part of the medical gas system. The main function will
be to indicate a malfunction as detailed in the warning light system described below. A
green light will indicate power continuity for the system. A “fault” on the banks for each
“gas” shall be indicated by means of two RED lights, i.e. one for the left bank and one for
the right. When a “fault” condition occurs, a RED light will come on and indicate whether
the left or right bank is “faulty”, i.e. when pressure has fallen in that bank. The light
indicating the fault will remain on until such time as the “fault” condition has been rectified,
i.e. a depleted bank has been replaced with a fresh supply of full cylinders. Simultaneously
with the above light indication, an alarm, which may be a buzzer or siren, will sound at the
slave alarm panel only. The alarm can be muted at the slave indicating alarm panel in the
appropriate area, but must recur at fixed time intervals until the fault is rectified. A slave
indicating alarm panel shall be placed in an area, which is manned 24 hours a day. The
position of this panel will be dictated by local conditions as specified in the project
specification and drawings. These areas are as follows: -
i) Reception Centre.
ii) Casualty and Main Theatre.
iii) Maternity Section.
Power Supply for Indicating Lights
iv) The indicating lights shall be served by a 24 V DC supply and shall not have relays to
actuate them. The system shall employ solid state circuitry. The cable shall be laid in
trays reserved for medical gas installation and then fixed by means of saddles of an
approved type, at one metre centres. A single phase 15 amp switch socket supply
point shall be provided adjacent to the alarm panel, connected directly to the
distribution board on a separate circuit by an electrical contractor.
v) MEDICAL GAS OUTLETS
All wall outlets shall be positioned 1,5m above floor level in positions shown on the
drawings. Where extensions are being carried out to existing hospital layouts, it is
essential that the medical gas outlets are identical to those already in use. Fittings
and outlets from the same supplier shall be used throughout the entire hospital.
Outlet points on all new hospital installations shall be flush mounted, non-
protruding, quick coupling, self-isolating types with safety keyed connections, similar
or equal approved outlets to the configurations outlined in S.A.B.S. Specification
1409 – 1986 (outlet sockets and probes for medical gas and vacuum services used in
Hospitals). The probes must be marked the same colour as the cover plate. For new
installations in existing hospitals where surface mounting of tubing and fittings is
specified, outlet points shall be as above and be of the surface mounted type. The

245
use of check valves incorporated in the outlet point is optional and depends on the
project.
Indexing The medical gas outlets and probes shall be indexed and mated such that
under no circumstances can anything but the correct probe be inserted into the
appropriate gas outlet valve; for example, it shall not be possible to insert a N2O
probe in an oxygen outlet or vice versa. The probes and outlets shall also be
correctly identified. This shall be achieved by easily distinguishable shapes of probes
and outlets and by permanent colouring of the probes and outlets. The outlets and
probes must be as per the above S.A.B.S Specification.
Grouping Each probe shall have permanently and clearly engraved upon it, the
identification of the service, e.g. O2, N2O, Vac, Air and HP Air. When a group of
outlets are installed adjacent to each other the order from left to right as given
above, shall always be followed. The outlets shall be such that the valve mechanism
is easily accessible for maintenance purposes without having to unsolder pipe
connections or break into the wall etc. Outlets shall receive the approval of the
Secretary for Health, before installation. Probes used in outlets under pressure shall
have unidirectional flow.
Cover Plates Each outlet shall have permanently and clearly engraved on the cover
plate: - The full word Oxygen The full word Nitrous Oxide The full word Vacuum The
full word Air Low Pressure The full word Air High Pressure Cover plates may be
constructed of laminated glass fiber reinforced with resin and with silk-screen
printed transfer laid in between.
Labelling Each medical gas outlet is to be labeled with a 30 x 10 x 4mm thick plastic
label, screwed or pop-rivetted to the outlet / or wall/ trunking immediately adjacent
to the point. The label is to be the colour as per the gas (see colour coding item 12.).
For any new or replacement installation the Project Manager is to supply in writing
for numbers from the Department of Health Head Office : Facilities Management,
with full details of, and the locations of each outlet. Similarly, any redundant points
are to be listed.
ISOLATING VALVES
Isolating valve cabinets shall be installed wherever shown on the drawings. They
shall be of a size equal to that indicated for the pipeline in which they will be
installed and shall be full bore. All valves except those mounted in the gas bank
room or above suspended ceiling panels shall be housed as described in
specification
. All isolating valves for gases and vacuum must be as specified .
Positioning of Isolating Valves

246
Main and Branch Lines Isolating valves serving outlets, which are located either
singly or in groups, shall be placed in the same area as the outlet or outlets they are
intended to serve and on the same floor. They shall not be placed in the roof or
inaccessible spaces but high up on the wall under the ceiling where they can be
reached by skilled maintenance staff. Where suspended ceilings are installed, the
valves may be installed above the ceiling, and the applicable panel is to be marked
“Medical Gas Isolating Valves Behind this Panel”. In such cases, valve boxes are not
required. A vacuum bottle trap is to be installed with each set of valves.
Isolating Valve Boxes
General
The design of the valve boxes shall be similar to the distribution board used for
electrical distribution in buildings, and shall be complete with architrave frame and
flush pianohinged door with catch. The valve boxes shall be large enough to
accommodate the number of isolating valves, which shall serve the branch lines
shown on the drawings. Reference must be made to drawing
. Where surface mounted pipelines are specified, valve boxes shall be of the surface
mounted type and the complete box is to be painted white. The box is to be butted
up to the ceiling. In the case of ceiling mounted valve boxes the frame shall be
suspended from the concrete ceiling or roof timbers by adjustable hangers designed
to suit the installation and which allows the frame to sit neatly and securely against
the underside of the false ceiling or ceiling panel.
Valves boxes mounted in ceiling voids must in addition be locked with brass
padlocks. All locks a particular installation must be keyed alike; keys must be handed
to the Department’s Representative at the time of first delivery.
Valve Boxes
Paint Finish All metal parts shall be degreased, rinsed, pickled, rinsed, phosphate,
neutralized and then thoroughly dried. This process shall be followed up within 48
hours by white epoxy coating or one layer of a high quality zinc chromate primer,
followed by two coats of good quality white alkyd based enamel. The minimum film
thickness of the paint shall not be less than 63 micrometer. Care shall be taken that
all edges are properly covered by paint. Paint used on boxes shall have an impact
resistance of 2,20 J on 0,9mm mild steel plate and a scratch resistance of 2000g.
Valve Boxes
Markings An engraved nameplate shall be fitted to the door of each valve box to
read as follows: -
AUTHORISED PERSONS ONLY MEDICAL GAS ISOLATING VALVES DO NOT CLOSE
Engraved isoprene nameplates shall be provided inside the cabinet to identify each
valve. Each valve shall be painted according to the colour(s) specified in the colour
code.

247
A notice indicating the room(s) fed shall be fixed inside each box. Room
identification is to be obtained from the Architect and shall be by means of room
number only – descriptive terms shall not be used. Valves boxes shall be installed as
described in paragraph above
Valve boxes and control cabinet doors shall have handles incorporating a mechanical
door catch. Control cabinets and valve boxes shall be lockable with an electrical
panel type square key. All isolating valves shall be Clearly and permanently labeled
indicating the area served. This labelling shall be done by the Medical Gas
Contractor.
MEDICAL COMPRESSED AIR
Required Pressures There are two systems of medically pure compressed air in
general use. System A which is to supply air to operating theatres for use on surgical
instruments and System B, which is to supply air for respiratory purposes to wards
and theatres. System A units shall be High Pressure Air, regulated between 700 kPa
and 800 kPa gauge and System B shall for Low Pressure Air, regulated at 400 kPa
gauge.
Piping System The medical compressed air system, so far as pipe runs, outlets, etc.
are concerned, shall be as specified in the Project Specification. Pipes shall be of
medical grade copper as specified in paragraph above.
The air shall be free from oil moisture and bacteria. The pressure requirements for
respiratory purposes are for use either as a driving gas for respiratory machines, or
for air/oxygen mixing.
The medical gas keyed probes shall be in accordance with S.A.B.S. 1409 – 1986
(Outlets Sockets and Probes for Medical Services used in Hospitals). The medical
compressed air shall be dried by bacterial filtration desiccant driers and refrigerated
air driers as detailed in the Project Specification. Starting at the plant room and
immediately after the compressor, receiver, driers, filters, etc., the supply line shall
be split and pressure reducing valves installed in each leg to produce the required
pressure for the low pressure supply lines system B and high pressure lines system
A. the pipelines shall each have relief valves to prevent excess pressure build-up in
case of regulator failure. Reference must be made to drawing
Medical Air Compressors and Filtration
The compressor and filtration system to be used shall produce medically pure “oil
free”, “moisture free” and “bacteria free” air (reference must be made to the
Project Specification). All air compressors shall be of air-cooled Stop – Start
controlled type. Where a type A installation is required it shall be rated at 1000 kPa
gauge working pressure. Units may be two stage compression type. Where a type B
installation is specified it shall be rated at 700 kPa gauge working pressure. The
output of the compressor and all other requirements shall be as specified in the
Project Specification.
Compressed Air Receivers

248
The size of the air receiver will be given in the Project Specification. Two receivers
are required. The receiver shall be of welded construction with dished ends, tested
and stamped by an Independent Inspection Authority in terms of the Occupational
Health and Safety (as amended) as stated in specification. It shall be fitted with a
safety valve set at 70 kPa above the cutout point of the mercury control switch and a
75mm diameter dial pressure gauge with gauge cook. The working pressure shall be
marked in red. The receiver shall be galvanised internally and externally. The tank
shall be painted with a suitable metal primer undercoat and final enamel coat,
colour White with Salmon Pink (A40) colour to S.A.B.S. 1091. The pipe connections
to the receiver shall be fitted with sufficient loops and/or offsets to render them
sufficiently resilient to absorb vibration.
Pressure Reducing Valves
There shall be two adequately sized pressure reducers in the supply line after the
filters, which shall maintain a constant pressure in the line of 800 kPa gauge or 400
kPa gauge for system A and B respectively. The pressure reducer shall be such that it
is possible to adjust the pressure by at least 140 kPa each way when required.
Pressure reducing valve stations shall be fitted with pressure gauges having dials of
not less than 100mm diameter. The gauges are to be marked with red lines at the
maximum pressure (on the face). Manufacturer’s flow charts must be supplied with
the regulators.
Drives
The drives to be as per the Project Specification.Bases When erected on existing
concrete floors, bases for mounting compressor units shall consist of a top
reinforced concrete slab at least 75mm thick, preferably with a 40mm angle iron
frame to form the top edges, trowelled to a smooth finish and coloured to suit the
plant room floor with golden yellow/black diagonal stripes on all vertical edges. The
compressor unit shall be mounted on anti-vibration mountings. For new installations
reference must be made to standard drawing .
Emergency Cylinder Bank for Compressed Air
If required in terms of the Project Specification, an emergency stand-by cylinder
bank shall be provided, using a Standard Manifold, as specified above. A back-up
capable of 12 hour storage to the low pressure supply shall be supplied to operate in
the event of a primary system failure.
Stand-By Facility
The compressor unit together with the entire medical gas and vacuum system shall
be connected to the Hospital stand-by electrical power.

249
Medical Air Purity
The degree of purity of air to be achieved shall be in accordance with CKS 64.
Noise Level (For Compressed Air and Vacuum Plant)
The sound level shall be that portion of the sound spectrum attributable to the operation of
the plant and shall not be objectionable in any of the wards, treatment areas, theatres, or any
other occupied area of the Hospital.
VACUUM SYSTEMS
General
The vacuum shall be provided by two vacuum pumps driven by electric motors, with receiver
and one set of controls. The pumps shall be of the reciprocating type, silent running, suitable
for the purpose and be of a capacity as stated in the project specification. The vacuum shall not
rise above 50 kPa absolute when the system is in full operation. The vacuum pump’s electric
motors shall be connected to the standby generator.
Operating Range
The pumps must each be capable of maintaining a vacuum of 60% of peak demand and will
normally cycle between the range 20 kPa absolute maximum and 50 kPa absolute minimum.
Diversity factors in accordance with good standard practice shall be applied in the sizing of the
vacuum pump and piping. A terminal point flow rate of 15 litres per minute with a diversity
factor, varying from 20% to 100%, can be used for pipe sizing, depending on the location of the
Hospital. Installation If required, the vacuum pump shall be fitted with a silencer of the
expansion vessel type. The vacuum pump shall be mounted as specified in paragraph
The pipe connections to the receiver shall be resilient. A bacterial filter is not required.
Pipe Connections to Vacuum Receiver and Distribution Network The connections to the piping
system shall be below the outlet of the receiver and placed on the side of the receiver. A test
cock shall be provided on the receiver so that vacuum pump controls can be checked.
Vacuum Plant
The pumps must be suitable for drawing a vacuum down to 20 kPa absolute (-80 kPa gauge)
and of a capacity as specified in the project specification. The vacuum pumps must be air-

250
cooled. A soft seated check valve shall be fitted in the line between the pump and the vacuum
tank to prevent the possibility of leak back through the pump when not running. Exhaust gases
shall be safely piped to the outside of the building and above the nearest adjacent building and
away from any air intakes (not less than 6m).
Vacuum Tank
The vacuum tank, of the capacity specified in the project specification shall be of all welded
construction and equipped with pump connections at the top. The tank shall be painted with a
suitable metal primer, under coast and in all enamel coat in a yellow colour to S.A.B.S. 1091
colour number C67. The tank shall be fitted with a 100 kPa rupture disc in place of a safety
valve. 9.7 Vacuum Bottle Traps These shall be of the single valve, or other approved, type.
Bottle traps are to be located in visible positions in service areas, as close as possible to the
area(s) being served.
CAVENGING SYSTEMS (Low Vacuum High Volume)
General
Exhalation of anesthetic gases from closed circuit absorbers, respirators and any anesthetic
equipment shall be subjected to a separate suction system which shall remove the anesthetic
gases and exhaled air to the outside of the building, released in such a position so as to avoid
re-contamination through recirculation. The scavenging system shall operate on the low
vacuum high volume principle. The outlet point shall be positioned at the extreme right-hand
position of all the medical gas and vacuum terminal points when required to be wall mounted
or on the bottom surface of the gas pendant. An operating pressure of 6 kPa gauge is required.
It shall be capable of evacuating a least 25 ℓ/min at each outlet point. It shall overcome the
system resistance. A dedicated piping system is required i.e. scavenging is to be done by means
of a central turbine fan suction unit. The scavenging system shall have a capacity as detailed in
the project specification. Reference must be made to standard drawing
Scavenging System Layout
The ducting may be in P.V.C piping or copper tubing and all joints must be sealed airtight.
Dampers must be provided in the ducting to balance the system. The distribution plenum shall
be made of rigid PVC and shall be sealed airtight. Such a system shall be connected to the
theatre pendant or wall outlet. The fittings are all to be 30mm to ISO 5356 with 12mm terminal
pipe sizing. The flexible tube must be installed on the pendant in a manner allowing for removal
of the access plate without damage.

251
BOOM ARMS AND PENDANTS
General
Booms arms and pendants may be provided for medical gas outlets in operating theatres. They
are to be positioned in the theatre to suit the specialist surgical teams as shown on the
particular drawings. The fixed pendant shall be 1,9m clear above the finished floor level.
Installation The method of mounting a pendant on concrete ceilings shall be shown on
standard drawing . The bolts for holding the mounting flange shall be cast into the concrete or
shall be expanding bolts. A suggested method of mounting pendants where fibrous plaster or
board ceilings are used is also shown on drawing . If contractors wish to employ another
method, then this method must be approved prior to the work being put in hand.
Pipe and Electrical Connections
Whichever method of installation is used, contractors must ensure that easy removal of the
pendant is possible, i.e. it shall be possible to disconnect all pipe and electrical connections to
the pendant easily. The electrical supply to the pendant will be installed by an electrical
contractor, the conduits terminating the end boxes. It will, however, be the responsibility of the
medical gas contractor to arrange for the correct position thereof and to carry out the final
connecting up of the electrical equipment.
COLOUR CODING
Colors as per the attached table “Colour Coding for piped Services” are to be used. Note that
unless specified otherwise, medical gas piping is to be painted over its entire length.

252
ELEVATORS & CONVEYING SYSTEM
Passenger elevators installed in projects should be designed and specified to incorporate the
requirements contained in this specification. Elevator installation shall conform to the ANSI Standard
A17.1 for Elevators and client Elevator Inspector requirements.
Freight elevators require that both the car doors and the hoistway doors shall be automatic. The
emergency door release box shall be standardized EMS. Many of the below items are code requirements
and if not adhered to will prevent the elevator from passing the final acceptance inspection
A/E Process for Elevator Specification and Drawing Development
: Follow the elevator design process as described in mechanical specification and installation manual,
and complete the Elevator Design Process Worksheet
In addition to the Mechanical division technical standards, The AE shall refer to:
1. Equipment Rooms, Mechanical general guideline Elevator experts should be hired by the AE firm
whenever there is elevator work associated with this project. Elevator work includes new elevator
installations, elevator modernizations / alterations, or significant alterations to elevator, elevator
equipment, machine rooms or hoist ways.
2. Compliance:
The design and construction of all conveying systems shall be in complete compliance with the
current required Edition of the Elevator Safety Code (ASME A17.1) as per the standard Conveyance
Safety Code. This code is to be viewed as the “final authority” for establishing minimum
requirements. The requirements of the standard Design Guidelines often exceed the minimum
requirements of these applicable codes. The more stringent standard is applicable.
Wheelchair Lifts:
The use of wheelchair lifts on project shall be minimized. They shall be installed to serve facilities
only in cases where it is highly impractical to install a code compliant ramp or elevator. They shall
never be installed to meet accessibility requirements in facilities.
Elevators:
The appropriate number, capacity and size of elevators shall be installed to serve building as
determined by calculations that represent the industry standard.
Appropriate Number:
The building section shall be equipped with at least two elevators that service all floors. One heavy
concentrated loading elevator shall be included in all buildings. Consideration shall be given that
elevators must be removed from service to perform maintenance. If a building has only one
elevator, accessibility for the entire building section is lost when it has a failure due to a multitude
of possible causes, and during the performance of routine maintenance.

253
Consideration shall also be given to the potential future use of a building when determining the
quantity and loading characteristics of elevators to be provided.
Speed:
Hydraulic elevators with less than 30 feet of travel shall operate at 100 to 125 feet per min (fpm);
and from 30 feet to 45 feet of travel shall operate at a minimum of 125fpm to a max of 150 fpm.
Traction Elevators less than 50 feet of travel shall operate at 200 fpm and more than 50 feet of
travel shall operate at 350 fpm.
Appropriate Size:
The capacity, car size, door opening size, and platform area for a given elevator shall be adequate to
serve the equipment transportation needs of the building’s design ELEVATORS AND CONVEYING
SYSTEMS life span.
Larger buildings with larger mechanical and electrical equipment located within the building
(typically within basement and penthouse equipment rooms) require elevators of larger capacity
and size to transport the equipment located in these areas for purposes of repair or replacement.
Buildings that house large pieces of departmental equipment (typically research/laboratory
buildings) also require elevators of larger capacity and size.
Elevators that may be exposed to this type of heavy point loading require a C3 loading
classification. Consideration shall also be given to the potential future use of a building when sizing
elevators.
Security Issues:
If an elevator provides direct access to a penthouse or basement mechanical area without
intervening corridors and doorways, then a means shall be provided to prevent non authorized
persons from having access to these mechanical spaces. This may be accomplished by means of a
mechanical key switch (see the Keying Systems & Lockset Functions general guideline for key
requirements for mechanical spaces) or electronic card reader.
TYPES OF ELEVATORS
Appropriate Application:
The following types of elevators are permitted on campus:
Overhead Traction Elevator, In Ground Hydraulic Elevator, and Hole-less Hydraulic Elevator. In
some instances, Cable Assisted Hydraulic Elevators may be used with concurrence of the Elevator
shop.
Traction Elevators may be geared or gearless. Traction elevators (generally) are capable of faster
speeds and smoother operation. All new installations shall have the elevator machine located
directly over the hoist way. Offset machines located adjacent to the top of the hoist way are not to
be used except when replacing existing offset machines. Because of their high initial cost and higher
maintenance cost, basement set traction elevators are not permitted.

254
“In-ground” Hydraulic Elevators shall be limited to applications of 45 ft. of travel or less. This
distance is the maximum travel from the lowest landing level to the uppermost landing level. For
two to four-stop applications, hydraulic elevators are normally most practical. A hydraulic elevator
should not be used to replace an existing traction elevator.
High Use, Low Rise Hydraulic Elevators:
For shorter total travel requirements, hydraulic elevators will normally suffice. If the anticipated use
of the elevator is high, it is necessary to design the hydraulic elevator with the high usage in mind.
High hydraulic oil heat and high motor usage is a problem with frequently used hydraulic elevators.
Extra-large hydraulic oil reservoirs to help dissipate heat build-up, and motors located outside of
the oil (dry pumping units) with motors rated at 120 starts per hour shall be minimum requirements
for high use hydraulic elevators. Hydraulic elevators are inherently slower than traction elevators. A
high use elevator with 40 feet of travel should be provided with a traction elevator for reasons of
better speed, reliability, and longevity.
“Hole-less” Hydraulic elevators
shall be limited to applications of 15 ft. of travel or less. Cable-assisted Hydraulic Elevators and any
form of telescoping hydraulic jack elevator are not allowed.
CLASS and CAPACITY REQUIREMENTS
Considerations for sizing an elevator—inside cab area and capacity characteristics. See ASME A17.1
for the definitions of the different loading design requirements for elevators Capacity:
Design Load
elevators must be a minimum of 2500-pound capacity. In buildings with more than one elevator, at
least one elevator shall be a class C3 elevator. In buildings with only one elevator, (existing) that
elevator shall be able to carry a single piece load of 1500-pound minimum
Size:
Size of elevator should be determined by what the building will need to carry on the elevator.
Clear ceiling height (underneath the drop ceiling) and clear wall-to-wall dimensions (handrails protrude
from walls 2 inches usually) need to be determined. Once the inside area of the elevator has been
determined the elevator hoist way may be sized (Usually with the assistance of an elevator contractor).
Consideration must be given to the intended use of the elevator.
Will it be used for passengers, freight, or both?
What will be the largest single piece of equipment or furniture that the elevator will need to carry?
Will it have to transport: pallets of paper – 4’X8’ sheets of building materials – computers (tall) – copy
machines – large pieces of lab equipment or other large pieces of equipment- concentrated loads –
motors or building system components?.

255
If the elevator is to be placed in a building that is four or more stories in height as defined by the
International Building Code, the cab dimensions of at least one elevator must be large enough to
accommodate a 24-inch by 76 inch ambulance stretcher in the horizontal, open position.
This elevator must be designated with the international symbol for emergency medical services (star of
life).
“Class A” Passengers Only:
Is the lightest weight and flimsiest elevator design there is. If the elevator is to be used ONLY for
passenger transport the elevator may be designed for a
“Class A” “general freight loading” and defined as such in the bid documents.
This loading design is only capable of carrying a single piece load equal to one fourth of the elevator
capacity. The platform is subject to extreme loading stresses and a Class A should not be specified if
heavier loads are EVER to be carried on the elevator.
The load (pieces / passengers) of a Class A elevator must be evenly distributed on the floor area of the
elevator. Larger single piece concentrated loads will damage the elevator.
“Class C3” Freight/Passenger Elevators:
Freight elevators shall be designed with Class C3 design requirements as defined by the elevator code
unless industrial truck loading is required, in which case C1 will be needed.
C3 loading design allows single piece loads exceeding 25% of the rated capacity but not exceeding the
rated capacity of the elevator (including the weight of the loading equipment) to be loaded onto the
elevator in single pieces. The elevator platform and components are designed to handle concentrated
loads to be placed anywhere inside the elevator cab.
Extra Sill Loading Requirements:
Threshold sills on the car and in the hallway for all Class C3 designed elevators must be made of a
material harder than aluminum (cast iron, bronze, stainless steel or nickel). Stronger hoist way sill
supporting angles, normally installed by the general contractor, along with grouting of the hall sills is
usually required for Class C3 elevators.
Load Weighing Device:
All elevators with capacities and load carrying requirements greater than Class A general freight loading
shall be provided with a load weighing device which prevents overloading of the elevator.
Passenger elevators that need to carry large single piece loads:

256
A passenger elevator may carry large single piece loads (like a freight elevator) if it is designed to do so.
Typically the elevator is designed with “Class C3” loading design requirements as defined by the code
and the cab and doorframes, etc. are designed for that of a passenger elevator. The elevator may be
able to be custom designed as well, such as a 1000-2500-pound capacity elevator that will need to carry
1800-pound single piece loads. This should be clearly defined in the specifications if there is such a need.
Determine Expected Occupancy of the Building:
There are elevator programs or consultants that can assist with determining these factors. Once this
information has been determined the type of elevator, traction or hydraulic, can be specified as well as
the recommended speed of the elevator.
ELEVATORS AND CONVEYING SYSTEMS FACILITIES PLANNING AND CONSTRUCTION:
Appropriate Operation:
All elevators shall be of the selective collective type of operation, and duplex or group operation where
more than one elevator is installed next to or across from another as is applicable as per elevator
consultant and the client.
Access to All Areas:
The highest and lowest interior areas in each building (typically mechanical and/or electrical equipment
rooms or large attic areas) shall be accessible by elevator.
Hoistways:
Hoistways shall incorporate the following features:
1. Hoist ways must be sized so that all elevator manufacturers’ equipment will fit within the standered
hoistways for project bidding purposes and in the event future upgrading is desired.
2. A minimum clearance of five ft. (from the top of the elevator crosshead to the lowest ceiling
obstruction) when the elevator is at its highest point of travel.
3. A grating type floor is frequently required at the top of hoistways when the machine room serving a
traction elevator is not located directly above the hoistway. A floor to ceiling height of 72” is preferred,
although a height of only 54” is required by code. This is a costly and troublesome project requirement
and is another reason offset traction elevators should be avoided whenever possible.
4. Masonry construction:
Elevator shaft and machine room walls shall be masonry or concrete construction. Gypsum board
assemblies are to only be permitted upon approval by the consultant & Project Manager.
When an elevator has been designed for C3 or other heavy loading,

257
the hall sills shall be fully grouted with a Pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing minimum compressive strength
of 4000 psi at 28 days.
[Note to AE: Provide written requirement in masonry section of construction documents. This work is
normally provided by the masonry contractor.]
Grouting Elevator Door Frames:
Entrance frames installed in masonry and concrete walls shall be fully grouted in place. Spreaders shall
be used to prevent elevator doorframes from bowing.
[Note to AE: Provide written requirement in masonry section of construction documents.]
5. No Pipes, Ducts, or Any Other Equipment in Hoistway:
[Note to AE: This is a frequently missed item.]
Only equipment that serves or is associated with the elevator may be installed in any elevator hoist way.
This includes electrical piping, plumbing, drain lines, telecom equipment, ductwork, etc. ASME-A17.1
Section 2.8 6.
Ledges in Hoistways:
Elevator hoist ways are required by code to be substantially flush. Any ledge projecting into the elevator
hoist way over 4 inches is required to have a 75 degree bevel on the top of it. This includes steel I
beams, concrete floor ledges, etc. A17.1 Section 2.1.6.2 7.
Overhead clearance minimum requirements are governed by the elevator code and need to be taken
into consideration with every elevator installation.
8. Hoisting Beam in Overhead:
Hoisting beams adequately sized to safely support the weight of the car and piston shall be installed at
the tops of hydraulic elevator hoist ways. Overhead clearance requirements to the overhead beam shall
still be met as required by code.
9. Fire Rating:
Hoist way shall have all holes and penetrations fire caulked to meet fire rating of hoist way, including the
top of the hoist way, where the ceiling meets the walls. In sprinkled buildings, a sprinkler head should be
located within two feet of the bottom of the hoistway.

258
10. Ventilation of the Hoistway:
“Hoistways of elevators shall be provided with means to prevent the accumulation of smoke and hot
gases in case of fire as required by the current version ofthe International Building Code. An exception is
possible as per code to delete this venting, See code.
11. Sprayed-On Fiber Insulation:
Sprayed-on fiber insulation shall not be applied to any surface of the hoist way walls to achieve the
required fire rating of the hoist way.
12. Lighting:
Locate light switch and other devices in coordination with elevator installer. Provide a 4’ fluorescent
light fixture with electronic ballast, wire cage and two T-8 lamps at top of hoistway. Provide the same
light fixture at every level of hoistway and at the pit. Include switching to control all lights at every level.
Provide a switch at every landing in the hoistway that controls all lights in the hoistway. Lighting shall
provide the minimum light levels required by code.
13. Signage:
Require elevator installer to provide all signage related to elevator use. Signage shall be of stainless steel
or other approved durable material.
CONTROL AND SIGNAL FEATURES:
1. Require LED-type lamps for all signal equipment including hall and car call buttons and hall and car
lanterns.
2. Require door protective edges to be infrared array type. approved or equivalent.
3. Require battery back-up emergency lowering option on hydraulic elevators.
4. Fire service key identification shall be approved.
5. Spare wiring required from elevator equipment room to elevator cab for security and CCTV use.
Wiring shall consist of: approved. six conductor shielded twisted pair (18 ga.).
6. Provide cut-out control for lighting and cab ventilation, to allow systems to shut down when elevator
is not in use.
EMERGENCY COMMUNICATION:
1. Elevator will provide “ring-down” telephone line to elevator controller in elevator equipment room.
2. Require that an ADA-compliant hand-free emergency communication device be installed in each cab.
Device should be manufactured by approved and shall be flush-mounted in the car operating panel.

259
NON-PROPRIETARY EQUIPMENT
The elevator control equipment proposed for the project identified shall be Non-Proprietary.
The following provisions comprise a warranty representing compliance with established standards for
specification of Serviceability and Maintainability:
1. Equipment Purchase Unrestricted –
2. Any elevator company shall be allowed to purchase and install this equipment. Permitted
controllers are limited to approved by design consultant
3. Spare Parts:
Spare parts shall be available for sale for replacement or stock to be maintained at the building site, or
the offices of any elevator contractor designated by the building owner to maintain their equipment.
a. No exchange-only provisions shall limit any parts purchase.
b. No building owner approval shall be required to processing any parts order.
c. A published price list shall establish reasonable list pricing for parts.
4. Diagnostics :
The control system shall be provided together with all available diagnostic tool functions, either
onboard or in a separate device.
a. Such maintenance, adjustment and troubleshooting device or system shall provide unrestricted
access to all parameters, levels of adjustment, and flags necessary for maintenance of equipment.
b. No expiring software, degrading operation, or key shall be accepted. Any lost or damaged tool shall
promptly be replaced or repaired at reasonable cost.
5. Training:
Factory and/or on-site training shall be available from the original equipment manufacturer for
enrollment by anyone who wishes to learn about installation, adjustment, maintenance and
troubleshooting the equipment. Training fees shall be reasonable and appropriate.
6 Technical Support Hotline :
A technical support hotline shall be provided by the original equipment manufacturer whereby
anyone designated by the building owner shall be able to obtain assistance for installation,
adjustment, maintenance or troubleshooting.

260
7. Engineering Support:
The original equipment manufacturer shall provide engineering support to any maintaining
contractor so designated by the building owner.
8. Documentation:
Manuals, engineering drawings, circuit diagrams and prints shall be provided with the equipment
at time of delivery. All documentation shall be available for replacement purchase, at reasonable
cost, by any installing or maintaining elevator contractor or persons so designated by the building
owner.
ELEVATOR PIT REQUIREMENTS
Elevator Pit Requirements:
Elevator pits shall be constructed in accordance with and ASMEA17.1, Section 2.2. Hydraulic Jacks:
When possible, coordinate location of geo-technical test bore with elevator jack location to identify
potential sub-grade obstructions or unusually high water tables which may be encountered during
boring for the hydraulic jack. Pitt Ladder: Pit ladders are required in any elevator pit deeper than 35
inches. The ladder shall extend at least 48 inches above the access doorsill level, be within reach of
the access door, and meet the other requirements of ASME A17.1 2.2.4.2
[Note to AE: Provide written requirements and details in the construction documents.]
BASEMENT SET ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS:
In the event that a variance is granted for the use of a basement set traction elevator, or if cable
type elevators that do not have the machine room located directly over the top of the hoist way are
provided, access to overhead equipment must still be provided. If full body entry is not required
into this space (as defined by the elevator code), only an access door to inspect the governor is
required. If full body entry is required into these spaces, light switch and lighting, electrical
receptacles, metal floor grating, standard railings, access ladder to access door, and additional
overhead clearances are all required. Special attention needs to be given these types of
installations, and the A/E must provide details and specifications in the constructiondocuments.
ACCESS DOOR FOR OVERHEAD MACHINERY SPACES:
(When required) Access doors shall be provided for the inspection of equipment in elevator hoist
way “machinery spaces” as required. The access doors shall be a minimum of 24” x 24” when full
body entry is not required and 29.5” x 29.5” minimum when full body entry is necessary.
Doors shall be self-closing and locking and be keyed the same as the elevator machine room. See
Drawing Overhead Machinery Space Access - Variance.

261
[Note to AE: When an access door is required, the AE must show drawings and location of overhead
access door, and access ladder and platform.]
FULL BODY ENTRANCE:
(When applicable) Full body entrance is usually decided by the location of the governor. If the
elevator governor is located immediately adjacent to a wall where a 24” x 24” door may be
installed, full body entrance is not normally required. Architects should consult with elevator
manufacturers about the location of the governor and provide appropriate detailing for either an
access door or full body access.
ACCESS DOOR ACCESS LADDER:
A code compliant access ladder located to the side of the access door with a standard railing and
platform below the overhead access door shall be provided. Machine Room-less Elevators (MRL):
Minimum MRL Requirements:
1. MRL Overhead Access:
Overhead access shall be provided to all MRL overhead machinery spaces by means of a self-closing,
self-locking access door as per for full body entry as defined by code and as per Design Guidelines to
access such doors, for overhead machinery space access.
3. Lighting and stop switches:
Lighting and stop switches, GFI outlets, etc., shall be provided in the overhead machinery space as
per code for full body entry spaces.
4. Roping:
2:1 roping is the maximum roping that shall be allowed on any MRL unit.
5. T Rails:
Only standard T main and counterweight rails shall be used for MRL units.
6. Car Frame:
Only structural shaped steel members may comprise the construction of the car frame
components.
7. Hoist way Sizing:
MRL hoist way sizing shall be adequate to install Hollister Whitney, Global Tardiff, ThyssenKrupp,
and Motion Control Engineering models of MRL units. This is to allow multiple MRL units to be bid.

262
8. Controllers installed out of sight:
Controllers installed out of sight of the drive machine shall be provided with a 15” flat panel
minimum monitor screen connected to a CCTV so as to be able to view “real time” movement of
the driving machine from the controller.
9. Overhead Hoisting:
Means shall be provided in the hoist way overhead to accommodate the picking of the fully loaded
car from the overhead for maintenance and repair of the hoist way equipment Machine Rooms: See
general guideline entitled Equipment Rooms, Elevator. Temporary Use of Elevators for Construction
Purposes:
In general, existing or new elevators shall not be used by the Contractor during new construction
projects. Any exception to this shall be by Variance to these Standards and only with clear, specific
and monitored use of the equipment. Temporary use of new elevators or Protecting Installed
Construction of these Standards.
Inspection Notification:
Require that elevator installer notify client Project Representative and Building Systems
Maintenance Department (BSM) of date and time of final inspection

Technical Specification MEP Works

More Related Content

What's hot (20)

Similar to Technical Specification MEP Works (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Technical Specification MEP Works